PCS-931_MY

Line Differential Relay

Instruction Manual

Nanjing Nari-Relays Electric Co., Ltd.

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NARI-RELAYS is dispatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided
to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the
recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
z

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;

Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;

Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!

ii

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous
z

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!
z

Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

z

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
z

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
z

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
z

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
z

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright
Manual: V1.00
P/N: EN_XLBH5104.0060.1101
Copyright NR 2009. All rights reserved
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information
contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties is strictly forbidden except where
expressly authorized.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 SuYuan. Avenue, Nanjing 211102China
Tel: 86-25-87178185, Fax: 86-25-87178208
Website: www.nari-relays.com
Email: [email protected]

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically,

and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or
improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without
notice.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

iii

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Table of Contents
Preface ....................................................................................................................................... i
Introduction........................................................................................................................ i
Health and Safety .............................................................................................................. i
Instructions and Warnings ...............................................................................................ii
Table of Contents .....................................................................................................................iv
Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................1
1.1 Application ...................................................................................................................1
1.2 Function .......................................................................................................................2
1.3 Features........................................................................................................................3
Chapter 2 Technical Data .........................................................................................................5
2.1 Electrical Specifications .............................................................................................5
2.1.1 Analog Input Ratings.........................................................................................5
2.1.2 Power Supply .....................................................................................................5
2.1.3 Binary Input .......................................................................................................6
2.1.4 Binary Output.....................................................................................................6
2.1.5 Power Supply Output for Opto-coupler ...........................................................6
2.2 Mechanical Specifications ..........................................................................................6
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range ..............................................................7
2.4 Communication Port ...................................................................................................7
2.4.1 Communication Port for RTU/SCADA .............................................................7
2.4.2 Communication Port for Print ..........................................................................8
2.4.3 RS-485 for Clock Synchronization ...................................................................8
2.5 Type Tests ....................................................................................................................8
2.5.1 Environmental Tests ..........................................................................................8
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ...............................................................................................8
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................8
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility .........................................................................9
2.6 Certifications ..............................................................................................................10
iv

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

2.7 Protective Functions .................................................................................................10

2.7.1 Optical Interface ..............................................................................................10
2.7.2 Fault Detector ..................................................................................................10
2.7.3 Current Differential Protection ....................................................................... 11
2.7.4 DPFC Distance Protection .............................................................................. 11
2.7.5 Distance Protection ......................................................................................... 11
2.7.6 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection ..................................... 11
2.7.7 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection .................................................... 11
2.7.8 Inverse-time Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection ................................... 11
2.7.9 Breaker Failure Protection ..............................................................................12
2.7.10 Transient Overreach ......................................................................................12
2.7.11 Fault Locator ..................................................................................................12
2.7.12 Auto-Reclosing ..............................................................................................12
Chapter 3 Protection Description ..........................................................................................13
3.1 General Description ..................................................................................................13
3.2 General Fault Detector Element (GFD) ....................................................................13
3.2.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element ............................................................................13
3.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element.............................................................14
3.2.3 Auxiliary Voltage Element ...............................................................................14
3.2.4 Transfer Trip Element ......................................................................................15
3.3 Protective Fault Detector Element (PFD) .................................................................15
3.4 DPFC Distance Protection ........................................................................................15
3.5 Current Differential Protection .................................................................................16
3.5.1 Application .......................................................................................................16
3.5.2 Function Description.......................................................................................17
3.5.3 Logic Scheme ..................................................................................................28
3.6 Overcurrent Protection .............................................................................................35
3.6.1 Application .......................................................................................................35
3.6.2 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection .....................................35
3.6.3 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection ....................................................37
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

3.6.4 Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection ....................................38

3.6.5 Overcurrent Protection when VT Circuit Failure...........................................40
3.7 Distance Protection ...................................................................................................40
3.7.1 Distance Element with Memorized Polarization ............................................41
3.7.2 Phase-to-ground Distance Element ...............................................................43
3.7.3 Phase-to-phase distance element ..................................................................46
3.7.4 Reversal Distance Element .............................................................................46
3.7.5 Blinder Scheme ...............................................................................................47
3.7.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing (PSBR) .....................................................47
3.7.7 Scheme Logic ..................................................................................................49
3.8 Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................................51
3.8.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................51
3.8.2 Function Description.......................................................................................51
3.8.3 Logic Scheme ..................................................................................................51
3.9 Switch onto Fault Protection ....................................................................................52
3.9.1 Zero-sequence SOTF Protection ....................................................................53
3.9.2 Distance SOTF Protection ..............................................................................54
3.10 Fault Phase Selection (FPS) ...................................................................................54
3.10.1 FPS Based on Deviation of Operation Voltage ...........................................54
3.10.2 FPS Based on Differential Current ...............................................................55
3.10.3 FPS Based on Phase Difference between I0 and I2A ...................................55
3.11 Pole Disagreement ..................................................................................................56
3.11.1 PD State by Single-phase Trip ......................................................................56
3.11.2 PD State by Three-phase Trip .......................................................................57
3.12 Trip Scheme .............................................................................................................57
3.13 Synchronism Check ................................................................................................63
3.13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................63
3.13.2 Function Description.....................................................................................63
3.13.3 Logic Scheme ................................................................................................64
3.14 Automatic Reclosure ...............................................................................................65
vi

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

3.14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................65

3.14.2 Function Description.....................................................................................66
3.15 Transfer Trip And Transfer Signal ..........................................................................69
3.15.1 Transfer Trip ...................................................................................................70
3.15.2 Transfer signal ...............................................................................................70
Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision .........................................................................................71
4.1 General Description ..................................................................................................71
4.2 Understand the Alarms..............................................................................................71
4.3 Relay Self-supervision ..............................................................................................74
4.3.1 Fault Detection Check .....................................................................................74
4.3.2 Trip Output Circuit Check ...............................................................................74
4.3.3 Settings Check.................................................................................................74
4.4 AC Input Monitoring ..................................................................................................74
4.4.1 Voltage and Current Drift Auto Regulation ....................................................74
4.4.2 DSP Sampling Monitoring...............................................................................75
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ..................................................................................75
4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ...................................................................75
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision ...........................................................................75
4.5.3 Bus VT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................75
4.5.4 Line VT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................76
4.5.5 CT Circuit Supervision ....................................................................................76
4.5.6 Binary Input Supervision ................................................................................77
Chapter 5 Metering and Recording .......................................................................................79
5.1 Metering......................................................................................................................79
5.2 Event & Fault Record ................................................................................................81
5.2.1 General Description ........................................................................................81
5.2.2 Event Recorder ................................................................................................81
5.2.3 Disturbance Recorder .....................................................................................82
5.2.4 Present Recording...........................................................................................83
Chapter 6 Hardware Description ...........................................................................................85

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

vii

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

6.1 General Description ..................................................................................................85

6.2 Typical Wiring ............................................................................................................86
6.3 Plug-in Modules .........................................................................................................89
6.3.1 MON Module ....................................................................................................89
6.3.2 DSP Module (Protection Function Calculation) ............................................91
6.3.3 DSP Module (Fault Detector Logic Calculation) ...........................................91
6.3.4 AI Module .........................................................................................................92
6.3.5 GOOSE Module ................................................................................................94
6.3.6 BI Module .........................................................................................................98
6.3.7 BO Module .....................................................................................................105
6.3.8 BO Module .....................................................................................................106
6.3.9 BO Module .....................................................................................................108
6.3.10 BO Module ................................................................................................... 110
6.3.11 BO Module .................................................................................................... 111
6.3.12 PWR Module................................................................................................. 112
6.4 Display Panel ........................................................................................................... 114
Chapter 7 Configurable Function ........................................................................................ 115
7.1 General Description ................................................................................................ 115
7.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software .......................................................................... 115
7.3 Protective Device Configuration ............................................................................ 115
7.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators .................................................................. 115
7.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input ....................................................................... 116
7.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output .................................................................... 117
Chapter 8 Settings ................................................................................................................ 119
8.1 Equipment Parameters............................................................................................ 119
8.2 System Parameters .................................................................................................121
8.3 Protection Settings ..................................................................................................122
8.4 Logic Settings ..........................................................................................................136
8.5 Equipment VEBI Settings........................................................................................143
8.6 GOOSE VEBI Settings .............................................................................................143
viii

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface ...................................................................................145

9.1 Overview...................................................................................................................145
9.1.1 Keypad Operation ..........................................................................................146
9.1.2 LED Indications .............................................................................................146
9.1.3 Communication Port .....................................................................................148
9.1.4 Communication .............................................................................................148
9.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ..............................................................................149
9.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................149
9.2.2 VALUES ..........................................................................................................152
9.2.3 REPORT .........................................................................................................152
9.2.4 PRINT..............................................................................................................153
9.2.5 SETTINGS ......................................................................................................154
9.2.6 LOCAL CONTROL .........................................................................................154
9.2.7 CLOCK ............................................................................................................155
9.2.8 VERSION ........................................................................................................155
9.2.9 TEST_MODE ..................................................................................................155
9.2.10 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................156
9.3 Understand the LCD Display ..................................................................................156
9.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................156
9.3.2 Normal Status Display...................................................................................156
9.3.3 Display Fault Report......................................................................................157
9.3.4 Display Self-supervision Report ..................................................................159
9.3.5 Display Binary Input Change Report ...........................................................160
9.3.6 Display Control Report .................................................................................164
9.4 Keypad Operation ....................................................................................................164
9.4.1 View Device Status ........................................................................................164
9.4.2 View Device Report .......................................................................................164
9.4.3 View Module Information ..............................................................................165
9.4.4 Print Device Report .......................................................................................165
9.4.5 View Device Setting .......................................................................................166
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

ix

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

9.4.6 Modify Device Setting ...................................................................................167

9.4.7 Copy Device Setting ......................................................................................169
9.4.8 Switch Setting Group ....................................................................................169
9.4.9 Delete Device Message .................................................................................170
9.4.10 Modify Device Clock....................................................................................170
9.4.11 Check Software Version ..............................................................................170
9.4.12 Communication Test ...................................................................................171
Chapter 10 Communications ...............................................................................................173
10.1 General Description...............................................................................................173
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ................................................................173
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface ..........................................................................................173
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ........................................................................................175
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ................................................................176
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ...........................................................176
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer .........................................................176
10.3.2 Initialization ..................................................................................................176
10.3.3 Time Synchronization .................................................................................177
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ...................................................................................177
10.3.5 General Interrogation ..................................................................................177
10.3.6 General Service ...........................................................................................177
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ..................................................................................178
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet ..............................................................178
10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .....................................................178
10.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................178
10.5.2 Communication profiles .............................................................................179
10.5.3 Server data organization .............................................................................180
10.5.4 Server features and configuration .............................................................182
10.5.5 ACSI Conformance ......................................................................................184
10.5.6 Logical Nodes ..............................................................................................188
10.6 GOOSE Service ......................................................................................................191
x

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction ...................................................................................191

10.6.2 GOOSE Function .........................................................................................191
Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning ......................................................................193
11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................193
11.2 Safety Information .................................................................................................193
11.3 Overview .................................................................................................................195
11.4 Unpacking And Checking The Protection Equipment ........................................195
11.5 Installing The Protective Device ...........................................................................196
11.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................196
11.5.2 Dimensions ..................................................................................................197
11.5.3 Grounding Guidelines .................................................................................197
11.5.4 Cubicle Grounding ......................................................................................198
11.5.5 Ground Connection on the Device .............................................................199
11.5.6 Grounding Strips and their Installation......................................................199
11.5.7 Making the electrical connections .............................................................200
11.6 Check the External Circuit ....................................................................................201
11.7 Energizing The Protective Device ........................................................................202
11.8 Setting The Protective Device ..............................................................................203
11.9 Establishing Connection And Verifying Communication ...................................204
11.10 Verifying Settings by Secondary Injection ........................................................204
11.10.1 Insulation Test (if required) .......................................................................205
11.10.2 AC Measurement Check ............................................................................205
11.10.3 Print Fault Report ......................................................................................206
11.10.4 On-load Checks .........................................................................................206
11.11 Final Check ...........................................................................................................207
Chapter 12 Maintenance ......................................................................................................209
12.1 Appearance Check ................................................................................................209
12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ...................................................................................209
12.3 Replace Failed Modules ........................................................................................210
12.4 Replace Button Battery ......................................................................................... 211

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

xi

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

12.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 211

12.6 Storage ................................................................................................................... 211
Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal ......................................................................213
13.1 Decommissioning ..................................................................................................213
13.2 Disposal..................................................................................................................213
Chapter 14 Manual Version History.....................................................................................215

xii

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Application
The PCS-931 is a digital EHV line differential relay with the main and back-up protection functions,
which mainly is designed for transmission line of 220KV and above.

PCS-931

Optical fibre channel

PCS-931

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-931

The main protection of PCS-931 comprises of current differential protection, which can clear the
fault immediately for the whole line. DPFC distance protection can reach to extremely fast speed
for the fault near the busbar.
The back-up protection of PCS-931 comprises of distance protection, directional zero-sequence
overcurrent protection, inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection, directional phase
overcurrent protection and breaker failure protection. Specially, one zone reversal distance
protection is also available in PCS-931. In addition, as a substitution, phase/zero-sequence
overcurrent protections are put into service automatically when VT circuit is failure.

Figure 1.1-2 Functional diagram of PCS-931

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 1 Introduction

PCS-931 can implement single-phase or three-phase trip and configurable auto-reclosing that can
implement 1-pole AR, 3-poles AR and 1/3-pole AR.

1.2 Function
1.

Main protection

Current differential protection (87)

z

DPFC current differential element

Steady-state current differential element

Zero-sequence current differential element

DPFC distance protection (21D)

2.

Backup protection

Phase-to-phase distance protection (21P)

Phase-to-ground distance protection (21G)

Reversal distance protection (21R)

Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection (67G)

Instantaneous zero-sequence overcurrent protection (50G)

Definite-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection (51G)

Directional phase overcurrent protection (67P)

Definite-time phase overcurrent protection (51P)

Inverse-time phase overcurrent protection (IDMT)

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection (IDMT)

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure (51PVT)

Zero-sequence overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure (51GVT)

Switch onto fault (SOTF)

z

Distance protection for SOTF

Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection for SOTF

3.

Additional function

Power swing blocking releasing (PSBR)

Auto-reclosing (79)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 1 Introduction

Synchronism check (25)

VT circuit supervision (VTS)

CT circuit supervision (CTS)

Line VT circuit supervision (LVTS)

Self diagnostic test

Voltage and current drift auto regulation

Fault location (FL)

Fault phase selection (FPS)

Note!
DPFC is the abbreviation of Deviation of Power Frequency Component. In case of a fault
in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the power frequency
components before the fault, the power frequency variables during the fault and the
transient variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.

1.3 Features
1.

Protection and Control

It adopts the new UAPC hardware platform of NR, and its AC inputs can support the electric
instrument transformer and conventional instrument transformer.
It adopts the high performance MCU and DSP processors, high-speed inner bus and
intelligent I/O interfaces. The modularization design of the hardware and software makes this
device be configured to meet the demands of different practical application, and it is very
convenient for maintenance.
High precision 16 bits A/D converter is adopted in this protection device.
This protection device can communicate with SAS or RTU, optional communication protocol:
IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850
Quickly clearing the internal fault for whole line, the time is less than 10 ms for fault where is
near the busbar, is less than 15ms for fault where is in the center of line and is less than 25ms
for fault where is in the remote end.
Plug connectors from the relay rear panel to the terminal blocks on the rack or cabinet, which
makes the on-site commissioning and replacement much easier than what you do the
commissioning using the traditional screw terminals on the rear panel.
Two independent data acquisition paths, one for fault detector element and another for
protections and logic functions, to prevent any undesired trip.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 1 Introduction

The unique DPFC distance element is integrated in the protective device, which can clear the
internal fault quickly with high sensitivity and high speed and is not affected by power swing.
Self-adaptive floating threshold which only reflects deviation of power frequency component
can defend system imbalance and system disturbance. Hence, it is both rather reliable and
very fast, and it is very sensitive but does not pickup frequently.
Main protection adopts integral transform to ensure high-speed; Back-up protection adopts
Fourier transform, which has an excellent filtering result, to ensure accuracy.
24 samples per cycle, all task including data measurement, protection calculation, logic
discrimination, event recording and protection logic calculation could be done within one
sampling period.
GPS clock synchronization PPS (pulse per second), PPM (pulse per minute) and IRIG-B
synchronization

High-speed 2048kbit/s multiplex channel or dedicated channel

2.

Communication

2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization

2~4 optional Ethernet ports, IEC 61850, or IEC 60870-5-103 over TCP/IP

2 optional Ethernet port via optic fiber (ST interface or SC interface)

3.

Monitoring and Metering

Event Recorder including 1024 tripping report, 1024 binary input change reports, 1024
self-supervision reports and 1024 control reports.
Disturbance recorder including 64 fault reports with waveforms (The file format of disturbance
recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

Self diagnostic test

4.

User Interface

Friendly HMI interface with 320240-dot LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.

1 RS-232 communication rear ports for printer

Multi-language - English, Chinese, Russian option

Auxiliary software - PCSPC

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications
2.1.1 Analog Input Ratings
1.

Analog current

Standard

IEC 60255-27:2005

Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency

505Hz, 605Hz

Rated Current

1A

5A

Linear to

0.05In~40In

0.05In~40In

Thermal withstand
-continuously
-for 10s
-for 1s
-for half a cycle

4In
30In
100In
250In

4In
30In
100In
250In

Burden

< 0.2VA/phase @In

< 0.25VA/phase @In

2.

Analog voltage

Standard

IEC 60255-6:1988

Rated Voltage (Un)

100V, 110V

200V

Linear to

0.01Un~1.7Un

0.01Un~1.7Un

Thermal withstand
-continuously
-10s
-1s

2Un
2.6Un
3Un

1.1Un
1.9Un
2.1Un

Burden at rated

< 0.25VA/phase @Un

2.1.2 Power Supply

Standard

IEC 60255-11:2008

Rated Voltage

110V/125V, 220V/250V

Variation

80%Un~120%Un

Permissible AC ripple
voltage

15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage

Voltage
interruptions

100ms for interruption without de-energizing

short

Voltage dips

Up to 10s for dips 40%Un without reset

Burden
Quiescent condition
Operating condition

<20W
<25W

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.1.3 Binary Input

Rated Voltage (Un)

24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V, 250V

Maximal
voltage

pickup

70%Un

Minimum
voltage

dropout

55%Un

Maximum permissible
voltage

120%Un

Withstand

2000VAC, 3000VDC

Resolving
logic input

time

for

<1ms

2.1.4 Binary Output

Item

Tripping contact

Output mode

Potential free contact

Continuous carry

8A@250V AC
5A@30V DC

8A

Pickup time

<5ms

<10ms

Breaking capacity

0.05A@110V DC resistance

0.2A@220V DC resistance

Making
(L/R=40ms)

2000VA

3040VA

250V AC
30V DC

380V AC
250V DC

Test voltage across

open contact

1000V RMS for 1min

1200V RMS for 1min

Short duration current

[email protected]

[email protected]

capacity

Maximal
voltage

system

Signal contact

2.1.5 Power Supply Output for Opto-coupler

Standard

IEC 60255-1

Rated Voltage

24V

Rated Current

200mA

Maximal current

500mA

2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions
(WHD)

482.6177291 (unit: mm)

Mounting Way

Flush mounted

Trepanning
dimensions (WH)

450179, M6 screw

Housing color

Silver grey

Weight per device

Approx. 20kg

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Display language

English

Housing material

Aluminum

Location of terminal

Rear panel of the device

Protection class
Standard

IEC 60225-1:2007

Front side

IP40, up to IP51 (Flush mounted)

Other sides

IP30

Rear side, connection

terminals

IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Standard

IEC 60225-1:2007

Operating
temperature

-25C to +55C

Transport and storage

temperature range

-40C to +70C

Permissible humidity

5%-95%, condensation not permissible

2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 Communication Port for RTU/SCADA

Electrical

RS-485
(EIA)

Optical
(Optional)

Ethernet

Electrical

Port number

Baud rate

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200

Transmission distance

<1000m@4800bps

Maximal capacity

32

Twisted pair

Screened twisted pair cable

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

Port number

Connector type

ST

Baud rate

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200

Transmission standard

100Base-FX

Transmission distance

<1500m

Optical fibre type

Multi-mode fibre

Wave length

850/820nm

Fibre size

62.5/125m (core DIA/cladding DIA)

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103: 1997

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

Port number

Connector type

RJ-45

Transmission rate

100Mbits/s

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Optical
(Optional)

Transmission standard

100Base-TX

Transmission distance

<100m

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103: 1997 or IEC 61850

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

Port number

Connector type

SC

Transmission rate

100Mbits

Transmission standard

100Base-TX

Transmission distance

<1500m

Optical fibre type

Multi-mode or single-mode

Wave length

853/1310nm for multi-mode

1310/1550nm for single-mode

Fibre size

62.5/125m (core DIA/cladding DIA)

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103: 1997 or IEC 61850

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.4.2 Communication Port for Print

RS-232 (EIA)

Prot number

Baud Rate

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400

Printer type

EPSON 300K printer

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 RS-485 for Clock Synchronization

RS-485 (EIA)

Port number

Transmission distance

<500m

Maximal capacity

32

Timing standard

PPS, IRIG-B

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test

Per IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test

Per IEC60068-2-2:2007

Damp heat test, cyclic

Per IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration

Per IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump

Per IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Standard
8

IEC 60255-27:2005
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Dielectric tests

Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Standard

IEC 60255-5:2000

Impulse voltage tests

Test voltage 5kV

Insulation resistance
measurements

Isolation resistance >100M@500VDC

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

1MHz
burst
disturbance test

Per IEC 60255-22-1:2007

Common mode: class III 2.5KV
Differential mode: class III 1.0KV

Electrostatic
discharge test

Per IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV

For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV

Radio
frequency
interference tests

Per IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III

Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=801000MHz
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz

Fast
transient
disturbance tests

Per IEC 60255-22-4:2008

Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns

Surge immunity test

Per IEC 60255-22-5:2008

Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Common mode: 2kV
Differential mode: 1kV

Conducted
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
Power
Magnetic
Immunity

RF

Frequency
Field

Pulse Magnetic Field

Immunity
Damped
magnetic
immunity

oscillatory
field

Per IEC 60255-22-6:2001

Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
kHz~80MHz
Per IEC 61000-4-8:2001
class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
Per IEC 61000-4-9:2001
class V, 6.4/16s, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-10:2001
class V, 100kHz & 1MHz100A/m

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.6 Certifications
z

ISO9001: 2000

ISO14001:2004

OHSAS18001: 1999

ISO10012:2003

CMMI L3

EMC: 89/336/EEC, EN50263:2000

Products safety(PS): 73/23/EEC, EN61010-1: 2001, EN60950: 2002

2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Optical Interface
Using multiplex channel or dedicated channel and transmission distance is smaller than 40kM,
PCS-931 is equipped with 1310nm laser emitter.
FO type:

Single mode, CCITT Rec.G652, 1310nm

Send power:

-14.02.0 dBm

Receive sensitivity:

-35 dBm

Maximum transmission distance:

<40kM

Optical overload point:

>-8 dBm

Using dedicated channel and transmission distance is greater than 40kM, PCS-931 is equipped
with 1550nm laser emitter.
FO type:

Single mode, CCITT Rec.G652, 1550nm

Send power:

-14.02.0 dBm

Receive sensitivity:

-35 dBm

Maximum transmission distance:

<100kM

Optical overload point:

>-8 dBm

2.7.2 Fault Detector

2.7.2.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element
Setting range:

0.1In~0.5In

Accuracy:

2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

10

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.7.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element

Setting range:

0.1In~0.5In

Accuracy:

2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.3 Current Differential Protection

Current setting accuracy:

5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay accuracy:

<5ms

Typical operating time:

<25ms

2.7.4 DPFC Distance Protection

Setting range:

0.1~7.5 (In=5A), 0.5~37.5 (In=1A)

Operating time:

<10ms (UOP>2UZ)

2.7.5 Distance Protection

Setting range:

0.01~25 (In=5A), 0.05~125 (In=1A)

Accuracy:

5% or 0.1 whichever is greater

Time delay:

0s~10s

Accuracy:

1%Setting+40ms

Operating time:

20ms (Zone 1)

2.7.6 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Setting range:

0.1In~20In

Accuracy:

5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay:

0s~10s

Accuracy:

1%Setting+40ms

2.7.7 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection

Setting range:

0.1In~20In

Accuracy:

5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay:

0s~10s

Accuracy:

1%Setting+40ms

2.7.8 Inverse-time Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Setting range:

0.1In~20In

Accuracy:

5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay:

0.5s~10s

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

11

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Accuracy:

5% of reference (calculated) value +2%

current tolerance, respectively 40ms

2.7.9 Breaker Failure Protection

Time delay:

0.01s~10s

Accuracy:

1%Setting+40ms

2.7.10 Transient Overreach

Tolerance for all high-speed protection: 2%

2.7.11 Fault Locator

Accuracy for multi-phase faults with one end source: < 2.5%
Tolerance will be higher in case of single-phase fault with high ground resistance.

2.7.12 Auto-Reclosing
Item

Range

Accuracy

Frequency difference

0.01~1.00 Hz

0.01 Hz

Phase difference

0~89 deg

2.0 deg

Voltage difference

0.02~0.8Un

1.0% Un

Item

Range

Reclosing time

0.01~50

Reclosing pulse length

0.01~50

Time of circuit breaker in closed state before AR ready

0.01~250

Maximal waiting time of the synchronism check

0.01~250

Check time of AR unsuccessful

0.01~250

Reset time

0.01~250

12

Accuracy

0.5%10ms

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.1 General Description
Designing hardware platform of PCS-931 based on the dual processor (DSP and CPU), two
independent fault detector elements are provided for each protection logic, i.e. GFD (general fault
detector element) and PFD (protective fault detector element).
GFD is used to control the output circuit of the protective device. PFD is used to trigger the
calculation of protective elements. Under the normal condition, the positive pole of DC power
supplied to tripping outputs is continually supervised by GFD, and the output circuit will be
switched on for tripping or reclosing only when GFD operates. It means that the relay will have the
capability to output a final tripping or reclosing signal while both GFD and PFD operate.

3.2 General Fault Detector Element (GFD)

Main part of GFD is DPFC overcurrent fault detector element that reflects the deviation of
phase-to-phase power frequency current, and zero-sequence overcurrent fault detector element
that reflects total current is taken as supplementary.
The GFD comprise of the following elements:

DPFC overcurrent element

Zero-sequence overcurrent element

Auxiliary voltage element

Transfer trip element

If any of the above fault detector elements operates, the GFD will operate to provide DC power
supply to the output relays to enable the output circuit.

3.2.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element

This element adopts adaptive floating threshold which consists of unbalanced output of deviation.
The adaptive floating threshold is kept higher than the unbalanced output all along, which makes it
not pick up frequently and have an extremely high sensitivity and reliability. By using adaptive
floating threshold, the unbalanced output value is small under normal condition, so this element
has extremely high sensitivity. When power swing occurs, the adaptive floating threshold
increases while the sensitivity decreases automatically, so it is not influenced by power swing
condition and need not be controlled by power swing blocking element.
Its criterion:
IMAX>1.25ITh+ISet

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

(Equation 3.2-1)

13

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Where:
IMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current
ISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [I_DPFC_OC_FD])
ITh: The floating threshold value
If operating condition is met, DPFC overcurrent element will operate to provide DC power supply
for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept 7 seconds after DPFC overcurrent element drops
out.

3.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element

This element will operate when both 3I0 and 3I0Cal are greater than the setting [I_ROC_FD].
Where:
3I0: zero-sequence current derived at the neutral current circuit from three-phase currents
3I0Cal: zero-sequence current calculated depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (i.e.
3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC)
If operating condition is met, zero-sequence overcurrent element will operate to provide DC power
supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept 7 seconds after zero-sequence overcurrent
element drops out.
When CT circuit failure is detected, this element will be disabled and an alarm [Alm_CTS] will be
issued.
Note!
The zero-sequence current should be connected to the protective device; otherwise all
protection elements corresponding with zero-sequence current will be blocked.

3.2.3 Auxiliary Voltage Element

Because DPFC overcurrent element and zero-sequence overcurrent element might not operate in
some special cases, in order to ensure protection device pick up in following three conditions,
PCS-931 provides auxiliary voltage element.
1. Internal fault associated with high fault resistance
2. In the case of weak infeed, internal unearthing fault
3. In the case of VT circuit failure or no VT connection, internal unearthing fault
The auxiliary voltage element will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay and pickup
signal will be kept 7 seconds after auxiliary voltage element drops out.
Note!
Here UN is the rated secondary phase voltage of VT. UNN is the rated secondary
14

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

phase-to-phase voltage of VT. (UN means phase voltage; UNN means phase-to-phase
voltage)

3.2.4 Transfer Trip Element

If the logic setting [En_FD_Ctrl_TT] is set as 0 and the transfer trip signal received from opposite
end of line, the transfer trip element will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay and
pickup signal will be kept 500ms after transfer trip element drops out.

3.3 Protective Fault Detector Element (PFD)

The protective fault detection element is the same as the general fault detection element.

3.4 DPFC Distance Protection

The power system is normally treated as a balanced symmetrical three-phase network. When a
fault occurs in the power system, by applying the principle of superposition, the load currents and
voltage can be calculated in the system prior to the fault and the pure fault component can be
calculated by whole fault current or voltage subtracted by load current or voltage. DPFC distance
protection reflects deviation of power frequency, therefore, only pure fault current and voltage is
useful to DPFC distance protection which is not influenced by load current and voltage.

For forward direction fault

jX

ZZD

ZS+ZK

ZK

-ZS

Figure 3.4-1 Operation characteristic for forward fault

ZZD: The setting of distance protection
ZS: Total impedance between local system and protective device location
ZK: Measurement impedance
Figure 3.4-1 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane when
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

15

Chapter 3 Protection Description

a fault occurs in forward direction, which is the circle with the Zs as the center and theZs+Zzd
as the radius. When measured impedance Zk is in the circle, the DPFC distance element will
operate. The DPFC distance element has a large capability of enduring fault resistance. When
there is infeed current from power source at the other end in the fault resistance, the phase of IN
is the same as I and the phase of voltage of fault resistance is same as I, so the fault resistance
appears resistive and is in parallel with R axes. The overreaching problem that results from infeed
current can be prevented.

For reverse direction fault

Figure 3.4-2 Operation characteristic for reverse fault

Z'STotal impedance between remote system and protective device location
Figure 3.4-2 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane when
a fault occurs in reverse direction, which is the circle with the Z's as the center and the Z's-Zzd
as the radius. The region of operation is in the quadrant 1 but the measured impedance Zk is
always in the quadrant 3, so the DPFC distance element will not operate and have the definite
directionality.
Note!
The DPFC distance protection can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic setting
and binary input. Please refer to section 8.4.

3.5 Current Differential Protection

3.5.1 Application
Current differential protection can be used as main protection of EHV and HV overhead line or
cable. It includes phase-segregated current differential protection and zero-sequence current
differential protection.
Current differential protection exchanges information among ends by optical fibre channel. The

16

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

protection device can flexibly select dedicated optical fibre channel or multiplex channel. The
protection device can calculate channel delay in real time, and adjust sample instant to ensure
synchronism sampling of each end based on channel delay. The channel delay is calculated on
the premise that the routine of both directions (receiving and sending) shall be same to each other.
The communication rate used by protection device is 2048kbit/s. The maximum one-way channel
propagation delay is 20ms. A transfer trip and two transfer signals can be transmitted to the
remote end to fulfill some auxiliary functions via a communication channel.
Through capacitive current compensation, the sensitivity of current differential protection is
improved. Because capacitive current compensation depends on voltage, capacitive current
compensation will be disabled automatically if no voltage is input or VT circuit fails.

3.5.2 Function Description

Based on channel supervision function, the protection device can automatically record temporal
channel status if the channel fails which will block current differential protection automatically. The
detailed channel status, including channel delay, current from the remote end and differential
current, can be display on the LCD.
Current differential protection comprises three elements:

DPFC current differential element

Steady-state current differential element

Zero-sequence differential element

3.5.2.1 DPFC Current Differential Element (Stage 1)

Operation criteria:

IDiff > 0.75 IBias

IDiff > IH

Equation 3.5-1

Where:
IDiff : The DPFC differential current ( IDiff = &IM + &IN )

IBias : The DPFC restraint current ( IBias = IM + IN )

IH : Max(1.5[I_Diff],

1.5UN
)
X C1L

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

17

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-1 Operation characteristic of DPFC current differential element (stage 1)

3.5.2.2 DPFC Current Differential Element (Stage 2)

Operation criteria:
IDiff > 0.75 IBias

IDiff > IQ

Equation 3.5-2

Where:

IQ : Max([I_Diff],

1.25UN
)
X C1L

IDiff and IBias are the same as those mentioned above.

IDiff

k=1
k=0.75

IQ

IBias

Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of DPFC current differential element (stage 2)

When the above criterion is met, the stage 2 of DPFC current differential element will operate after

18

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

25ms.
3.5.2.3 Steady-state Current Differential Element (stage 1)

Operation criteria :
IDiff > 0.6 IBias

IDiff > IH

Equation 3.5-3

Where:
IDiff : The phase differential current ( IDiff = &IM + &IN )
IBias : The phase restraint current ( IBias = &IM &IN )
IH : Max(1.5[I_Diff],

1.5UN
)
X C1L

Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of steady-state current differential element (stage 1)

3.5.2.4 Steady-state Current Differential Element (stage 2)

Operation criteria :
IDiff > 0.6 IBias

IDiff > IM

Equation 3.5-4

Where:
IM : Max([I_Diff],

1.25UN
)
X C1L

IDiff and IBias are the same as those mentioned above.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

19

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-4 Operation characteristic of steady-state current differential element (stage 2)

When the above criterion is met, the stage 2 of steady-state differential current relay will operate
after 25ms.
3.5.2.5 Zero-sequence Current Differential Element

Zero-sequence differential current element is sensitive to high resistance ground fault.

operation criteria:
IDiff0 > 0.75 IBias0

IDiff0 > IM

IDiff > 0.15 IBias

IDiff > IM

Equation 3.5-5

Where:
IDiff0 : The zero-sequence differential current
IDiff : The phase differential current
IBias0 : The zero-sequence restraint current ( IBias0 = &IM0 &IN0 )
IM : [I_Diff]
IBias is the same to those mentioned above

20

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-5 Operation characteristic of zero-sequence current differential element

When the above criterion is met, the zero sequence differential current relay will operate after
45ms.
3.5.2.6 Capacitive Current Compensation

For the long transmission line whose capacitance current is very large, in order to increase the
sensitivity of zero-sequence current differential element when a ground fault associated with fault
resistance occurs, capacitance current must be compensated to eliminate the effect that
capacitance current has on differential current. The traditional method of compensating
capacitance current can only compensate steady-state capacitance current. However, during the
transient period, such as closing circuit breaker to no-load line, clearing external fault and so on,
there are large transient capacitance current in the line. The traditional method cannot
compensate the capacitance current completely, hence, a new method is available, which can
compensate transient component of capacitance current.
1.

For long transmission line without shunt reactor

Phase capacitance current of line can be derived from equivalent circuit. For normal operation
condition, closing circuit breaker to no-load line and clearing external fault, not only steady-state
component of capacitance current but also transient component of capacitance current can be
compensated. It can improve the sensitivity of differential protection.

Figure 3.5-6 equivalent circuit

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

21

Chapter 3 Protection Description

For different system frequency, the capacitance current which is shown in above figure can be
calculated by:
ic = C

duc
dt

Equation 3.5-6

Where:
ic : Capacitance current flowing through each capacitance

C : Capacitance value
u c : Voltage between both ends of capacitance
Based on the result of above equation, i.e. Equation 3.5-6, capacitance of each phase can be gained.
2.

For long transmission line with shunt reactor

Because a part of capacitance current has been compensated by shunt reactor, reactance current
IL must be subtracted from capacitance current calculated by above equation, i.e. Equation 3.5-6.

Figure 3.5-7 Equivalent circuit of shunt reactor

Because the current and voltage of reactor meet the following relation:
UL (t) - Uf (t) = L P

diL (t)
dt

Equation 3.5-7

To perform integral operation for Equation 3.5-7 from t to t-t, IL can be calculated by:
iL (t) = iL (t - t) +

1
LP

[U (t) U (t)]dt
t t

Equation 3.5-8

Then,
ic = C
3.

duc
iL (t)
dt

Equation 3.5-9

For short transmission line

Because capacitance current is very small, the sensitivity of current differential protection can still

22

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

meet the requirement. The function, capacitance current compensation, will be disabled
automatically if differential current is smaller than 01IN.
3.5.2.7 CT Supervision

If CT circuit failure occurs, delayed alarm will be issued. When CT circuit failure occurs on an end,
the FD and current differential protection on this end might operate at once. However, FD on
another end will not operate and not send any permissive signal of current differential relay.
Therefore, the current differential protection will not maloperate. Meanwhile the healthy end will
issue alarm signal [Alm_Diff_ChA] which will be treated as the same as the alarm [Alm_CTS].
However, if CT circuit failure associated with internal fault or pickup due to system disturbance is
detected, the protective device will show two kinds of behavior.
If logic setting [En_CTSBlkDiff] (differential protection being blocked during CT circuit failure) is set
as 1, the differential protection will be blocked.
If logic setting [En_CTSBlkDiff] is set as 0 and the differential current of the faulty phase is more
than the differential current setting [I_Diff_CTS] during CT circuit failure, the differential protection
will operate with alarm signal being issued at the same time.
3.5.2.8 CT Saturation

The incorrect operating of current differential protection would occur due to transient CT saturation
at the moment when external fault occurs. Hence, the protective device adopts high restraint
coefficient and self-adaptive floating restraint threshold, which can prevent current differential
protection from mal-operation even in serious saturation case.
3.5.2.9 Synchronous Sampling

One of the protection devices on both ends is set as reference end (the end whose ID code is
greater, [ID_Local]>[ID_Remote]) and normally called master; the device on the other end is set
as synchronous end (the end whose ID code is smaller, [ID_Local]<[ID_Remote]) and normally
called slave. The protection device exchanges information of both ends through synchronous
mode. The sampling interval of the reference end is fixed and the synchronous end will adjust
sampling interval at any time until the synchronization condition is satisfied.
The preconditions for synchronous sampling of the protection devices on both ends include:
1.

The maximum time delay of the single-directional transmission of the channel 20ms.

2.

The receiving and sending route of the channel shall be conformable (i.e. the transmission
time delay of the two directions shall be equivalent).

Typical adjusting method for sampling time has two steps:

1.

Measure time delay of channel

Side S sends a frame of message to side M, and meanwhile records the sending time tss on the
basis of relative clock on side S. When side M receives the message, it will take the relative clock
of the device on side M as the basis to record receiving time tmr of the message, and send a
frame of message to side S at next fixed time, meanwhile take tms-tmr as the content of
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

23

Chapter 3 Protection Description

message. Side S will receive the message from side M at the time tsr and obtain tms-tmr.
Therefore, we can obtain the time delay of the channel Td through calculation:

Td =

(t sr t ss ) (t ms t mr )
2

Figure 3.5-8 Calculation schematic diagram of channel time delay

2.

Measure the sampling time error of the protection devices on both ends through the slave and
adjust the slaves time of sampling pulse according to the time delay of the channel, to realize
synchronous sampling.

The master implements the sampling in fixed interval Tsm and meanwhile sends message to the
slave on the basis of internal clock of the protection device. When the slave receives the message
from the master, it can know the sampling time of the master according to the time delay of the
channel and obtain the sampling time error T of the protection devices on both ends according
to its current sampling time. It is shown in Figure 3.5-9. The slave adjusts the next sampling time to
make T0. When T is less than the error, we can think the protection devices on both ends
realize synchronous sampling.

Figure 3.5-9 Schematic diagram for synchronous sampling adjustment

3.5.2.10 Communication Channel Interface

Depending on the difference of the amount of optic fibre core and the distance permitted to

24

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

transmit, the protection device can select two modes including dedicated optical fibre channel and
multiplex channel. The multiplex channel is not recommended unless the receiver power does not
meet the requirement due to too long transmission line.
Dedicated 2048kbit/s channel is shown in Figure 3.5-10, Two fibre cores of optical cable are
dedicated to differential protection

Figure 3.5-10 Application of dedicated 2048kbit/s channel

Multiplex 2048kbit/s channel is shown in Figure 3.5-11.

Differential
Protection

RX

2048kbit/s

TX

Coaxial cable

Pig Tail

SDH Device
MUX2M

Pig Tail

E1Interface

Optic fibre
communication
net

Figure 3.5-11 Application of multiplex channel

3.5.2.11 Communication Clock

Data exchange is very important to digital differential protection.

The differential relay sends and receives data based on respective clock, which are called transmit
clock (i.e. clock TX) and receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be extracted
from data frame, which can ensure no drop-out data code generated and no receive error data
code received. Clock TX has two options:
1) Use internal crystal clock, which is called internal clock. (master clock)
2) Use clock TX, which is called external clock. (slave clock)
Depend on the difference of the clock used by the differential relays of the two terminals, there are
three modes.
1.

Master-master mode

Both ends use internal clock.

2.

Slave-slave mode

Both ends use external clock.

3.

Master-slave mode

One of them uses internal clock, the other uses external clock. (Not recommended)
Depending on the logic setting [En_InnClock_ChA], current differential protection selects the
communication clock mode. The inner clock is enabled automatically when the logic setting
[En_InnClock_ChA] is set as 1. Contrarily, the outer clock is enabled automatically when the
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

25

Chapter 3 Protection Description

logic setting [En_InnClock_ChA] is set to 0.

If the protection device uses multiplex PCM channel, logic setting [En_InnClock_ChA] at both
ends should be set as 0. If the protection device uses dedicated optical fibre channel, logic
setting [En_InnClock_ChA] at both ends should be set as 1.
3.5.2.12 Identity Code

In order to ensure reliability of protection device when digital communication channel is applied,
providing settings [ID_Local] and [ID_Remote] is used as identity code to distinguish uniquely
protection device in the remote end using same channel.
During normal operation, the identity code of protection device in the end should be different with
that of protection device in the remote end. In addition, it should be different with that of protection
device used to protect other transmission line. In one word, identity code of protection device, i.e.,
the setting [ID_Local], should have uniqueness in the power grid. The setting range is from 0 to
65535. Only under the test mode, they can be set as the same.
The end of which setting [ID_Local] should be same as the [ID_Remote] of the other and the
greater [ID_Local] between the two ends is chosen as a master end for sampling synchronism, the
other is a slave end. If the setting [ID_Local] is set as same as [ID_Remote], that means the
equipment in loopback testing state.
The setting [ID_Local] is packaged in the data frame and send to the remote end of line through
channel. When [ID_Local] received by protection device is same to the setting [ID_Remote] of this
protection device, the message received comes from the remote end of line certainly and is valid,
and protection information involved in message is read. When they are not equal, the message is
thought as invalid and protection information involved in message is ignored. corresponding
alarms [Alm_ID_ChA] and [Alm_ChA] will be issued.
3.5.2.13 Channel Statistics

The protection device has the function of channel statistics and can monitor the channel status on
line. The protection device can form a channel statistic report automatically at 9:00 every day and
the report can be printed for operator to understand the channel quality. The monitoring contents
of channel status are shown as follows, and they can be gained by the menu VALUES
COMM_CH_STATE.
1.

Beginning time, [Time_Start]

It shows the starting time of the channel status statistics of the protection device in the local end.
2.

Master-slave mode of local device [Equip_Local]

It shows that local protection device is master or slave.

3.

ID code of the remote end, [ID_Remote_ChA]

It shows the ID information received by the device on this end under present conditions.
4.

26

Time delay of channel A, [t_Dly_ChA]

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

It shows the calculated data of the channel time delay of the protection device on this end under
present conditions. (unit:us)
5.

Total amount of error frame of channel A, [N_CrcFail_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of the wrong frames of the device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)
Error frame means that this frame fails in CRC check.
6.

Total amount of abnormal messages of channel A, [N_FrameErr_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of abnormal messages of the device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)
7.

Total amount of loss frames of channel A, [N_FrameLoss_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of the invalid frames of the device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)
8.

Total amount of abnormal

[N_RemoteAbnor_ChA]

messages

from

the

remote

end

of

channel

A,

It shows the total numbers of abnormal messages received from the remote end from starting time
of channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)
9.

Seconds of serious error frames of channel A, [t_Second_CrcFail_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of seriously error frame seconds of the protection device on this side
from starting time of the channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if
beyond 65535)
10. Desynchronizing times of channel A, [N_LossSyn_ChA]
It shows the desynchronizing times of the protection device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

27

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3 Logic Scheme

3.5.3.1 Common Element

Where:
DIFF Enable (Local end): local current differential protection is enabled
DIFF Enable (Remote end): remote current differential protection is enabled
IDiff>[I_Diff] (A)

&
Common differential condition (A)

IDiff>0.15IBias (A)
IDiff>[I_Diff] (B)

&
Common differential condition (B)

IDiff>0.15IBias (B)
IDiff>[I_Diff] (C)

&
Common differential condition (C)

IDiff>0.15IBias (C)

Where:
IDiff: differential current
IBias: restraint current
A: phase A
B: phase B
C: phase C

28

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Idiff>[I_Diff_CTS]

&

[En_CTSBlkDiff ]

>=1
CT circuit failure

>=1

[Alm_Diff_ChA]

&
DIFF Enable (Local end)

&

DIFF Enable (Remote end)

&
Differential condition 1 (A)
Common differential condition (A)

&
Differential condition 1 (B)
Common differential condition (B)

&
Differential condition 1 (C)
Common differential condition (C)

When binary input [EBI_DiffP], virtual binary input [VEBI_DiffP] and logic setting [En_DiffP_ChA]
are all set as 1, the signal DIFF Enable is valid. They can be visible or invisible in the protection
device through configuration based on different project. If they are invisible, the signal DIFF
Enable (Local end) is valid by default.
The signal DIFF Enable (Remote end) is an information from the remote end via optical fibre
channel, which is used to indicate whether current differential protection in the remote end is
enabled or not.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

29

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.2 DPFC Differential Element (stage 1)

&

Differential condition 2 (A)

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (A)

DPFC DIFF1 (A)

&

Differential condition 2 (B)

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (B)

DPFC DIFF1 (B)

&

Differential condition 2 (C)

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (C)

DPFC DIFF1 (C)

[En_DPFC_Diff1]
Op_DPFC_Diff1 (A)

>=1

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (B)

Op_DPFC_Diff1

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (C)

Where:
DPFC DIFF1: stage 1 of DPFC differential element
3.5.3.3 DPFC Differential Element (stage 2)
Differential condition 2 (A)

&

DPFC DIFF2 (A)

Differential condition 2 (B)

0ms

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (A)

25ms

0ms

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (B)

25ms

0ms

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (C)

&

DPFC DIFF2 (B)

Differential condition 2 (C)

25ms

&

DPFC DIFF2 (C)

[En_DPFC_Diff2]
Op_DPFC_Diff2 (A)

>=1

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (B)

Op_DPFC_Diff2

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (C)

Where:
DPFC DIFF2: stage 2 of DPFC differential element

30

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.4 Steady-state Differential Element (stage 1)

&

Differential condition 2 (A)

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (A)

Steady-state DIFF1 (A)

&

Differential condition 2 (B)

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (B)

Steady-state DIFF1 (B)

&

Differential condition 2 (C)

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (C)

Steady-state DIFF1 (C)

[En_Stdy_Diff1]
Op_Stdy_Diff1 (A)

>=1

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (B)

Op_Stdy_Diff1

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (C)

Where:
Steady-state DIFF1: stage 1 of steady-state differential element
3.5.3.5 Steady-state Differential Element (stage 2)
Differential condition 2 (A)

&

Steady-state DIFF2 (A)

Differential condition 2 (B)

0ms

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (A)

25ms

0ms

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (B)

25ms

0ms

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (C)

&

Steady-state DIFF2 (B)

Differential condition 2 (C)

25ms

&

Steady-state DIFF2 (C)

[En_Stdy_Diff2]
Op_Stdy_Diff2 (A)

>=1

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (B)

Op_Stdy_Diff2

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (C)

Where:
Steady-state DIFF2: stage 2 of steady-state differential element

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

31

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.6 Zero-sequence Differential Element

&

Differential condition 2 (A)

REF DIFF (A)

40ms

0ms

Op_REF (A)

40ms

0ms

Op_REF (B)

40ms

0ms

Op_REF (C)

&

Differential condition 2 (B)

REF DIFF (B)

&

Differential condition 2 (C)

REF DIFF (C)
[En_REF]
Op_REF (A)

>=1

Op_REF (B)

Op_REF

Op_REF (C)

3.5.3.7 Differential Inter-trip Element

Differential condition 2 (A)

&

Inter-trip element (A)

Differential condition 2 (B)

0ms

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (A)

10ms

0ms

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (B)

10ms

0ms

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (C)

&

Inter-trip element (B)

Differential condition 2 (C)

10ms

&

Inter-trip element (C)

[En_PhSeg_RecvTT]
Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (A)
Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (B)

>=1
Op_PhSeg_RecvTT

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (C)

32

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.8 Accelerated Inter-trip Element

3.5.3.9 Send Permissive Signal

At weak infeed end, current fault detector element maybe does not operate, weak infeed logic
determines whether weak infeed condition is met by distinguishing voltage and current conditions.
When three binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are all energized, the
protection device thinks circuit breaker as be in open position.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

33

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.10 Differential Protection Self-check

[BI_Send_TT]

4s

10s

Receiving transfer trip

4s

10s

Loss data frame (CHA)

100ms

>=1
Alm_TT

1s

&
Alm_NoValidFram_ChA

[En_DiffP_ChA]
[ID_Remote]Remote ID (CHA)

100ms

1s

&
Alm_ID_ChA

[En_DiffP_ChA]
Rate of error code >10E-5 (CH A)

10s

10s

&
Alm_CRC_ChA

[En_DiffP_ChA]
Loss data frame (CHA)

&

Fault detector

Alm_OutDiffP_ChA

[En_DiffP_ChA]
Alm_FrameLoss_ChA

>=1

Alm_ID_ChA
DiffP is out of service

Alm_ChA

&
1s

4s

[En_DiffP_ChA]
Common differential condition (A)

>=1

Common differential condition (B)

&

Common differential condition (C)

10s

10s

Alm_Diff_ChA

&

DIFF Enable (Local end)

DIFF Enable (Remote end)
Calculated IdiffA Actual ldiffA

2s

10s

Alm_CompParam_ChA

Where:
CHA: channel A
Remote ID: received ID from the remote end
DiffP: differential protection
IdiffA: differential current of channel A

34

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.11 Transfer Trip and Transfer Signal

3.6 Overcurrent Protection

3.6.1 Application
The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases
with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must operate very
quickly for faults very close to the generation (and protective device) point, for which very high fault
currents are characteristic.
The conventional distance protection can manage the fault clearance of earth-faults in most of the
cases. In some applications, especially applications with long lines, the clearance can be
improved by use of an instantaneous zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

3.6.2 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection consists of four stages zero-sequence
overcurrent elements with directionality. Only stage 1 can operate instantaneously. In the case of
stage 3 and stage 4, their directional element can be enabled or disabled by setting the logic
setting [En_Dir_ROC3] and [En_Dir_ROC4]. When logic setting [En_Dir_ROC3] or [En_Dir_ROC4]
is set as 0, stage 3 or stage 4 of zero-sequence overcurrent protection is no-directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection.
Each stage can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic setting respectively. For stage 3
and stage 4, when the accelerated tripping condition is met, they will operate to trip with a shorter
time delay (subtract 500ms) if the logic settings [En_ROC3_SOTF] and [EN_ROC4_SOTF] are set
as 1.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

35

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3I0>[I_ROC_FD]
&
3I0Cal>[I_ROC_FD]

&

ROC DIR+

F0+
F0&

ROC DIR-

&

[En_ROC1]

Op_ROC1

3I0Cal > [I_ROC1]

&

[En_ROC2]

[t_ROC2]

&

Op_ROC2

3I0Cal > [I_ROC2]

&
1
[En_Dir_ROC3]
[En_ROC3]
3I0Cal > [I_ROC3]

T1

&

500ms

&

Op_ROC3

Op_ROC4

&

Tripping command

&

Fault detector

&

[En_ROC4_SOTF]
1
[En_Dir_ROC4]
[En_ROC4]
3I0Cal > [I_ROC4]

&

T2

500ms

&

Tripping command

&

Fault detector

&
&

[En_ROC4_SOTF]

Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Where:
T1: [t_ROC3]-500ms
T2: [t_ROC4]-500ms
F0: forward zero-sequence element
36

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

F0: reverse zero-sequence element

3.6.3 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection

The overcurrent protection in this relay provides three-stage phase overcurrent protection with
independent definite-time characteristics. Each stage can be enabled or disabled by scheme logic
settings independently. All overcurrent element and directional element settings apply to all three
phases but are independent for each stage. Configuring the relevant settings can enable or
disable the corresponding directional element.

Reverse direction
lm=-780

UJ

Forward direction
IJ

Figure 3.6-2 Operation characteristic of direction element

Where:
lm: The positive-sequence sensitive angle of line
The stage 1 and stage 2 of phase overcurrent protections are only definite-time characteristic.
However, the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection it also can be set as inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection.
When the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection also can be used as inverse definite minimum
time (IDMT) overcurrent protection, various methods are available to achieve correct relay
coordination on a system; by means of time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and
current. Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable difference in
fault level between the two relay locations. Grading by time is used by some utilities but can often
lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near source substations where the fault level is
highest. For these reasons the most commonly applied characteristic in coordinating overcurrent
relays is the IDMT type. The inverse time characteristic complies with the following formula (based
on IEC60255-4 standard).

t=

( I / I p ) 1

TP

Where:
= Constant
= Constant
t = Operation time
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

37

Chapter 3 Protection Description

I = Measured current
Ip is the current threshold setting; the current setting of the stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection [I_OC3] is used as the Ip in this relay. If the stage 4 overcurrent protection is used
as IDMT overcurrent protection.
Tp is the time multiplier setting; the time setting of the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection
[t_OC3] is used as the Tp in this relay. If the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection is used as
IDMT overcurrent protection.
Three types of IDMT characteristic curves are applied in this relay. The setting [Opt_InvOC3] can
be used to select the expected curve.
Opt_InvOC3

Curve Name

Standard Inverse

0.14

0.02

Very Inverse

13.5

Extremely Inverse

80

The logic scheme of directional phase overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.

VT circuit failure
Forward direction
1
&

[En_Dir_OC1]
Max(IA, IB, IC)> [I_OC1]

&

[t_OC1]

&

[t_OC2]

&

[t_OC3]

Op_OC1

[En_OC1]
1
&

[En_Dir_OC2]
Max(IA, IB, IC)> [I_OC2]

Op_OC2

[En_ROC2]
1
&

[En_Dir_OC3]
Max(IA, IB, IC)> [I_OC3]

Op_OC3

[En_OC3]

Figure 3.6-3 Logic diagram of directional phase overcurrent protection

3.6.4 Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is available in PCS-931, which is normal
inverse-time characteristic in accord with the specification of IEC 60255-4. Its operation criterion
is:

38

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

t(I0 ) = TP (

0.14

)
I
( 0 )0.02 1
IP

Where:
TP : Time constant, i.e. the setting [t_InvROC]
IP : Reference current, i.e. the setting [I_InvROC]

Figure 3.6-4 Normal inverse-time characteristic

According to the different value of TP, different curves of normal inverse-time characteristic are
available. The logic scheme of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is shown in the
Figure 3.6-4.
3I0Cal>[I_InvROC]
&

F0+

&

&
[En_Dir_InvROC ]

IDMT

Op_InvROC

[En_InvROC ]

Figure 3.6-5 Logic diagram of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Where:
[t_InvROC]: Time delay of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
[I_InvROC]: Current setting of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
[En_Dir_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
controlled by direction element
[En_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

39

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.6.5 Overcurrent Protection when VT Circuit Failure

When bus VT circuit failure happens, the distance protection will be disabled. As a substitute,
phase overcurrent protection and zero-sequence overcurrent protection will be put into work
automatically in this case if VEBI setting [VEBI_DistP] and [VEBI_ROC] are set as 1.

Figure 3.6-6 Logic diagram of zero-sequence/phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure
Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.
All stages of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection are under the control of
zero-sequence overcurrent element, so the current setting for each stage should be greater than
[I_ROC_FD].

3.7 Distance Protection

The distance protection comprises 3 zones phase-to-phase distance elements, 3 zones
phase-to-ground elements which include mho characteristic and quadrilateral characteristic and 1
zone reversal distance element. When the fault with high resistance occurs, phase-to-ground
element with quadrilateral characteristic can operate correctly. In order to ensure the reliability,
phase-to-ground element with quadrilateral characteristic will operate with a longer time delay than
phase-to-ground element with mho characteristic.
For each independent distance element zone, full scheme design provides continuous
measurement of impedance separately in three independent phase-to-phase measuring loops as
well as in three independent phase-to-ground measuring loops.
Phase-to-phase distance element is suitable as a basic protection function against two- and
three-phase faults in all kinds of networks, regardless of the treatment of the neutral point.
Independent setting for each zone separately makes it possible to create fast and selective
protection in power systems.
Phase-to-ground distance element serves as basic earth fault protection in networks with solidly or
low impedance grounded networks. Independent setting for each zone separately makes it
possible to create fast and selective protection in power systems.
Polarized positive sequence voltage is used for distance protection so that faults with high
resistance can also be cleared easily. In case of short lines, in order to enhance performance
against high fault resistance, the impedance characteristic of the zone 1 and zone 2 could be

40

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

inclined toward quadrant 1.

Zero-sequence reactance character is used for phase-to-ground distance element so that
overreach due to resistance earth fault could be avoided.
If the positive sequence polarized voltage is high enough, directionality of the distance protection
using positive sequence polarized voltage is very good. However, when close-in three phase fault
happens, the positive sequence voltage may reduce to 10% or less, the distance protection will go
to low voltage program (please refer to section 3.7.1) in which memorized positive sequence
polarized voltage is used instead.
Threshold will be set forward for zones 1 and 2 of distance element before its operation, so that
directionality could be assured during busbar three phase fault. In addition, this threshold will be
changed to reverse direction after operation of the protection, so that forward close-in three phase
fault can be fully cleared. As to the zone 3 of the distance element, direction of the threshold is
always reverse, because it acts as a backup protection for busbar.
Note!

When VT circuit failure happens, the alarm [Alm_VTS] displayed, all distance protection
will be disabled.

3.7.1 Distance Element with Memorized Polarization

3.7.1.1 General Description

Distance element with memorized polarization is an algorithm used when positive sequence
voltage reduces to 10% or less. There are only two possibilities for this condition: power swing or
three phase short circuit fault.
As the power swing will be identified by power swing blocking function, only three phase short
circuit should be considered and discussed herein.
Because three phase-to-ground impedance and three phase-to-phase impedance are equal in
case of three phase short circuit fault, so only phase-to-ground impedance should be measured.
Impedances of all three phase are usually equal. Nevertheless, in order to ensure fast tripping
even in the case of transition from bus fault to three phase line fault, all of three phase impedances
are calculated and operation of any phase element will lead to three phase tripping.
3.7.1.2 Operation Characteristic

Distance element with memorized polarization compares phasor angle between operating voltage
and polarized voltage.
1.

A fault in forward direction

The transient operation characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-1. Operation characteristic of ZK on

R-X plane is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and -ZS as the diameter. The origin is
enclosed in the circle.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

41

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.7-1 Operation characteristic for forward fault

ZZD: the setting of distance protection
ZS: total impedance between local system and protective device location
ZK: measurement impedance
This does not mean it will operate incorrectly during reverse direction fault but means it will
operate correctly during forward fault even if the fault occurs just on the outlet because that is
derived supposing forward direction fault.
2.

A fault in reverse direction

Figure 3.7-2 shows operation characteristic of measured impedance -ZK on R-X plane. This
characteristic is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and Z'S as the diameter. It will operate
only when -ZK is in the circle. Therefore directionality of the protection is explicit.

Figure 3.7-2 Operation characteristic during reverse fault

Z'Stotal impedance between remote system and protective device location
42

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

The conditions mentioned above are before fading of memorized voltage, in another word, they
are transient characteristic.
jX

ZZD

ZK

Figure 3.7-3 Steady state characteristic of three phase short circuit fault
When the memorized voltage fade, Figure 3.7-3 shows operation characteristic of measured
impedance ZK on R-X plane for forward direction fault as well as that of -ZK for reverse direction
fault. Since the circle covers the origin, the equipment will be just on the margin of operation for
fault on the bus or line outlet. In order to prevent the mal-operation for bus fault, especially the
three phase bus fault with arc resistance, zone1 and 2 of distance element is equipped with a
positive threshold. Voltage value of the threshold is equal to maximum voltage drop of the arc.
Moreover, when zone 1 or 2 of distance element operates, phase of the threshold voltage will be
inverted so that the origin can be enclosed in the characteristic circle to ensure the fault can be
fully cleared. In order to ensure backup protection of zone 3, phase of threshold voltage is always
inverted and the origin is always enclosed in the characteristic circle.

3.7.2 Phase-to-ground Distance Element

3.7.2.1 Mho Phase-to-ground Distance Element

1.

Zone 1/2

This element use polarized positive sequence voltage which can improve the performance against
the fault resistance so that it cannot overreach when earth fault associated with high fault
resistance occurs.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

43

Chapter 3 Protection Description

jX

1=0

ZZD

1=15

1=30

A
R
-ZS

Figure 3.7-4 Characteristic of the relay for forward fault

In short line case, in order to improve the relay performance against high fault resistance, phase
shift 1 is used for polarized voltage. This phase shift could move the directional impedance
characteristic toward quadrant 1 as is shown in Figure 3.7-4. Value of 1 can be set to 0, 15 or
30.
This relay could measure high fault resistance and keep a very satisfied performance under high
fault resistance condition. However, if there is a considerable power source in remote end, an
overreach caused by infeed from remote end during resistance earth fault may occur. In order to
prevent overreach, the following zero sequence reactance relay is introduced.
2.

Zero-sequence reactance element

Typical zero-sequence reactance characteristic is shown as the straight line A in Figure 3.7-4.
Therefore, directional impedance characteristic integrating with the zero sequence characteristic
are adaptive with the fault resistance.
Actually, zero sequence reactance characteristic line will incline downward for 12. Therefore, in
an actual system, even if zero sequence impedance angles of both ends of a line are not the same
and the phase difference exists between 3I0Cal and voltage drop on fault resistance, overreach
condition will not happen. If the directional distance element with phase shift 1 and zero
sequence reactance element operate simultaneously, zones 1 and 2 of distance element with
good directionality will operate.
3.

Zone 3

The no-memorized positive sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage because during earth
fault, positive sequence voltage is mainly formed by healthy phase and the phase of positive
sequence voltage is kept as it was before the fault. Therefore, characteristic of zone 3 of
phaseto-earth distance element is the same as the transient characteristic of distance element
with memorized polarization and have a very good directionality.

44

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.7.2.2 Quadrilateral Phase-to-ground Distance Element

The sensitivity of phase-to-ground distance element with Mho characteristic may be not enough
during ground fault with extreme high resistance. So additional three-zone phase-to-ground
distance element with quadrilateral characteristic is adopted in the equipment to compensate the
sensitivity of Mho characteristic. The logic relationship between quadrilateral distance element and
Mho distance element is OR. It means that any ground fault in one of the two operation zones will
be cleared. The quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element can significantly improve the
sensitivity to clear ground fault with extreme high resistance. The three zones of quadrilateral
characteristic can be enabled or disabled by the logic setting [En_ZPG1_Quad], [En_ZPG2_Quad]
and [En_ZPG3_Quad] respectively. The operation characteristic of quadrilateral distance element
is shown in Figure 3.7-5:

Figure 3.7-5 Operation Characteristic of quadrilateral distance element

Where:

is the phase angle of positive sequence line impedance

[R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] or [R3_Quad] is the resistance setting of corresponding zone of
quadrilateral distance protection
[Z_PG1], [Z_PG2] or [Z_PG3] are the impedance setting of corresponding zone of Mho distance
protection.
The quadrilateral characteristic is a supplement to Mho characteristic for phase-to-ground
distance protection. It is used to improve sensitivity for ground fault with high resistance. However,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

45

Chapter 3 Protection Description

if the voltage is extreme low, the directionality of quadrilateral characteristic is not clear. However,
Mho characteristic of phase-to-ground distance element using polarized positive sequence voltage
has definite directionality. Therefore, In case that phase voltage is lower than 10% of rated voltage,
the quadrilateral characteristic will be disabled automatically and the Mho characteristic is
reserved.

3.7.3 Phase-to-phase distance element

3.7.3.1 Zone 1/2

Zone 1,2 of phase-to-phase distance element use polarized positive sequence voltage. Phase
shift 2 is introduced here for polarized voltage in zones 1 and 2 just like 1 in case of
phase-to-ground distance element. It is used also for improving performance against high fault
resistance in short line case. Value of 2 can be set as 0 or 15or 30.
3.7.3.2 Zone 3

No-memorized positive sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage. Operation characteristic of

faulty phase is shown as Figure 3.7-1 and Figure 3.7-2. This element has a very good
directionality.

If three-phase short circuit fault occurs, since the polarized voltage has not been memorized, its
operation characteristic is a circle passing through the origin (Please refer to Figure 3.7-3). If the
positive sequence voltage is low, the fault will be measured by impedance element with
memorized polarization. There is neither problem about dead zone nor loss of directionality for bus
fault in this case.

3.7.4 Reversal Distance Element

When a fault occurs in the backside of the busbar, reversal distance element is provided to clear it
with defined time delay and is taken as backup protection for reversal busbar fault. Its operation
characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-6.

Figure 3.7-6 Operation characteristic of reversal distance element

46

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

ZZD is impedance setting [Z_Rev] of reversal distance element, usually, which is set to 50% of the
protected line. In order to prevent existing dead zone in the protected zone, origin is included in
the operation characteristic which is shifted 0.5 ZZD toward forward direction.

3.7.5 Blinder Scheme

The blinder characteristic shown in Figure 3.7-7 can be used to restrict the reach of a distance
relay on a long line or during heavy load conditions. The distance relay will be allowed to trip only
when both blinders are operated (i.e., the apparent impedance must be between the two
characteristics).
jX

ZZD

R
RZD

RZD

Figure 3.7-7 The operation characteristic of blinder

In order to ensure distance relay not affected by load impendence, the phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground blinders are used. As shown in Figure 3.7-7, the slope of blinder is same to
positive sequence sensitivity angle , RZD is the setting [R_Blinder]. The operation region is
between line A and line B. The logic setting [En_Blinder] can decide whether the blinder is enabled
or not.

3.7.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing (PSBR)

When power swing occurs on the power system, the impedance measured by the distance
measuring element may vary from the load impedance area into the operating zone of the
distance element. The operation of the distance measuring element due to the power swing
occurs in many points of interconnected power systems. To keep the stability of whole power
system, tripping due to operation of the distance measuring element during a power swing is
generally not allowed. PCS-931 adopts releasing power swing blocking to avoid maloperation of
distance protection resulting from power swing. In another word, distance protection is blocked all
along under the normal conditions and power swing. Only if fault (internal fault or power swing with
internal fault) is detected, power swing blocking for distance protection is released by PSBR
element.
Power swing blocking for distance element will be released if any of the following PSBR elements

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

47

Chapter 3 Protection Description

operate.

Fault detector PSBR element (FD PSBR)

Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element (UF PSBR)

Symmetrical fault PSBR element (SF PSBR)

Pole disagreement PSBR element (PD PSBR)

1.

Fault detector PSBR element

If any of the following condition is matched, FD PSBR will operate for 160ms.
1) Positive sequence current is lower than the setting [I_OC_PSBR] before general fault detector
element operates.
2) Positive sequence current is higher than the setting [I_OC_PSBR] before general fault
detector element operates, but the duration is less than 10ms.
2.

Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element

The operation criterion:

I0+I2>mI1
The m is an internal fixed coefficient which can ensure UF PSBR operate during power swing
with internal unsymmetrical fault, while not operate during power swing or power swing with
external fault.
3.

Symmetrical fault PSBR element

If a three-phase fault occurs and FD PSBR is invalid (160ms after GFD operates), neither FD
PSBR nor UF PSBR will be able to operate to release the distance protection. Thus, SF PSBR is
provided for this case specially. This detection is based on measuring the voltage at power swing
center:
UOS=U1COS
Where:
: the angle between positive sequence voltage and current
U1: the positive sequence voltage
The criterion of SF PSBR element comprises the following two parts:

when -0.03UN<UOS<0.08UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 150ms.

when -0.1UN<UOS<0.25UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 500ms.

4.

Pole disagreement PSBR element

When three-phase circuit breaker is in the unsymmetrical state, PD PSBR will operate if any of the
following conditions is met.

48

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

1)

The faulty phase selected by fault phase selection element is not the phase tripped.

2)

The difference of current deviation of power frequency component between two healthy
phases increases to certain value all of a sudden.

3.7.7 Scheme Logic

Figure 3.7-8 Logic diagram of PSBR for zone 1 and zone 2 of distance element
The logic setting [En_PSBR] is common for zone 1, 2 of distance element. If the logic setting
[En_PSBR] is set as 0, zone 1 and zone 2 of distance element is not blocked by PSBR and
PSBR for zone 1 and zone 2 of distance element will operate right now (i.e. output state of
[PSBR_Z1/2] is 1).
If the logic setting [En_PSBR] is set as 1, zone 1, 2 of distance element is controlled by PSBR.
After zone 2 of distance element operates and PSBR condition is also met, PSBR for zone 1 and
zone 2 of distance element will operate (i.e., output state of [PSBR_Z1/2] is 1).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

49

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.7-9 Logic diagram of distance protection

50

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection

3.8.1 Overview
If the breaker fails to be tripped, breaker failure protection will operate to re-trip the breaker after a
specified time delay setting [t_BFP1], and trip all adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same
busbar and line remote end circuit breaker after a specified time delay setting [t_BFP2]. In general,
the time delay setting [t_BFP1] is less than [t_BFP2].
3.8.2 Function Description

Breaker failure protection consists of two stages. They have independent current setting and time
delay respectively. After short time delay [t_BFP1], local circuit breaker will be tripped. After longer
time delay [t_BFP2], all adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same busbar and line remote
end circuit breaker will be tripped.
Breaker failure protection with phase-segregated current element as auxiliary blocking condition
can be initiated by phase-segregated tripping contacts from line protection and three-phase
tripping contact from other protection device. To increase the reliability of BFP initiated by
phase-segregated tripping contacts from line protection, as phase overcurrent element is possibly
less than load current, zero-sequence overcurrent element can be enabled by the logic setting
[En_ROC_1P_BFP].
In order to increase the sensitivity of breaker failure protection for the fault occurring in the
transformer or shunt reactor and so on, zero-sequence overcurrent and negative-sequence
overcurrent elements can be selected by logic settings separately. When this protective function
operates, the protection device will issue three-phase tripping command to local circuit breaker
after the time delay of stage 1 [t_BFP1] is expired, and then issue tripping command to all adjacent
circuit breakers connected to the same busbar and the circuit breaker in the remote end of
transmission line after the time delay of stage 2 [t_BFP2] is expired.

3.8.3 Logic Scheme

The following figure shows the logic scheme of breaker failure protection.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

51

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.8-1 Scheme logic of breaker failure protection

3.9 Switch onto Fault Protection

When the circuit breaker is closed manually or automatically, it is possible to switch on to an
52

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

existing fault. This is especially critical if the line in the remote station is grounded, since the
distance protection and directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection would not clear the fault
until their time delays had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is
desired.
The SOTF (switch onto fault) protection is a complementary function to the distance protection and
to the directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection. With the SOTF protection, a fast trip is
achieved for a fault on the whole line, when the line is being energized. It shall be responsive to all
types of faults anywhere within the protected line.
The SOTF protection shall be controlled by an reclosing logic using both voltage and current level
detectors. It shall be enabled for a period when the circuit is energized either manually or via a
auto-reclosing system.

3.9.1 Zero-sequence SOTF Protection

3I0>[I_ROC_FD]
&
3I0Cal>[I_ROC_FD]
Status of 3-pole AR
1
&

Status of manually closing

100ms

&

Op_ROC_SOTF

3I0Cal > [I_ROC_SOTF]

&

Status of 1-pole AR

60ms

Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of zero-sequence SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.
Zero-sequence SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
60ms when 1-pole auto-reclosing.
Zero-sequence SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
100ms if 3I0Cal is greater than setting [I_ROC_SOTF] when 3-pole auto-reclosing or manually
closing.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

53

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.9.2 Distance SOTF Protection

Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.
Zone 3 of distance element for SOTF will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker when
manually closing.
Zone 2 and 3 of distance element for SOTF without PSBR logic will operate to trip three-phase
circuit breaker if the logic setting [En_Z2SOTF_AR3P] and [En_Z3SOTF_AR3P] are set as 1
when 3-pole auto-reclosing.
Zone 2 of distance element for SOTF with PSBR logic will operate to trip three-phase circuit
breaker when 1-pole or 3-pole auto-reclosing if the logic setting [En_Z2SOTF_AR3P] is set as 0.

3.10 Fault Phase Selection (FPS)

Fault phase selection logic can be implemented by the following methods:
1.

Detecting the deviation of operation voltage

2.

Detecting the differential current

3.

Detecting the phase difference between I0 and I2A

The logic makes the relay ideal for single-phase tripping applications.

3.10.1 FPS Based on Deviation of Operation Voltage

UOPA, UOPB and UOPC: deviation of phase operation voltages.
54

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

UOPAB, UOPBC and UOPCA: deviation of phase-to-phase operation voltages.

UOMAX=MAX(UOPA, UOPB, UOPC).
UOMAX=MAX(UOPAB, UOPBC, UOPCA).
If UOMAX is several times higher than the other two deviation of phase operation voltages, the
single-phase fault is ensured, otherwise, the multiplex-phase fault is ensured.
Table 3.10-1 The relation between UOMAX and fault phase
UOMAX or UOMAX

Fault phase

UOPA

Phase A

UOPB

Phase B

UOPC

Phase C

UOPAB

Phase AB

UOPBC

Phase BC

UOPCA

Phase CA

3.10.2 FPS Based on Differential Current

The current differential protection of PCS-931 is phase segregated differential protection, so the
operating phase is the fault phase when DPFC current differential element and phase current
differential element operate.

3.10.3 FPS Based on Phase Difference between I0 and I2A

The phase selection algorithm uses the angle relation between I0 and I2A of the relay currents. As
shown in Figure 3.10-1, three regions of fault phase selection are ensured.

Figure 3.10-1 The region of fault phase selection

Depended on the phase relation between I0 and I2A,
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

55

Chapter 3 Protection Description

When -60<Arg(I0/I2A)<60, region A is selected, 60<Arg(I0/I2A)<180, region B is selected,

180<Arg(I0/I2A)<300, region C is selected.
Table 3.10-2 The relation between Arg(I0/I2A)and fault phase
Arg(I0/I2A)

Region

Fault phase

-60~60

A phase or BC phase

60~180

B phase or CA phase

180~300

C phase or AB phase

1. For single-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of faulty phase are in-phase and its distance element
operates.
2. For two-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of non-faulty phase are in-phase but its distance element
does not operate.

3.11 Pole Disagreement

Circuit breaker pole position disagreement can occur on the operation of a breaker with
independent operating gears for the three poles. A pole disagreement can be tolerated for a
limited time.
Pole disagreement procedure comprises of the protection of pole disagreement state and switch
onto fault protection. When the following conditions are met, pole disagreement state is ensured
delay 50ms.
1.

Trip confirmation

Trip confirmation means that tripping signal is issued and any phase current is smaller than 0.06IN
2.

[BI_52b_Pha]=1, [BI_52b_Phb]=1, [BI_52b_Phc]=1 and line current is smaller than 0.06IN

3.11.1 PD State by Single-phase Trip

When there is single-phase tripping confirmation or any phase [BI_52b_Phx]=1 (x can be a, b or c)
and corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06IN, pole disagreement state is confirmed by
protective device. After that, the following things will be done.
1.

Single phase tripping confirmation or any phase [BI_52b_Phx]=1 (x can be a, b or c) and

corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06IN

2.

Measuring impedance deviation of power frequency component of non-fault phase and

non-fault phase-to-phase

3.

Calculating positive voltage of non-fault phase as polarized voltage of distance protection

4.

Measuring current deviation of power frequency component of non-fault phase as condition to

release power swing blocking under pole disagreement

5.

When tripped phase current is greater than 0.06IN or corresponding phase [BI_52b_Phx]=0 (x
can be a, b or c), SOTF protection is initiated for 200ms

56

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.11.2 PD State by Three-phase Trip

When there is three-phase tripping confirmation or [BI_52b_Pha]=1, [BI_52b_Phb]=1,
[BI_52b_Phc]=1 and threes currents, IA, IB and IC, are smaller than 0.06IN, pole disagreement state
is confirmed by protective device. After that, the following thing will be done.
1.

When threes currents, IA, IB and IC, are greater than 0.06IN or [BI_52b_Pha]=0,
[BI_52b_Phb]=0, [BI_52b_Phc]=0, SOTF protection is initiated for 200ms

When pole disagreement state is ensured, corresponding tripped phase-to-ground and

phase-to-phase DPFC distance protection will be disabled. Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence
overcurrent protection are disabled and inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is not
controlled by directional element.
When the primary system is in the single-phasing, three-phase trip signal will be sent with a time
delay of 200ms if the following conditions are met.
1.

Any two phase of [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are energized

2.

The corresponding phases current are smaller than 0.06IN

3.

The zero-sequence current is smaller than 0.15IN

3.12 Trip Scheme

1.

Tripping logic 1

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

57

Chapter 3 Protection Description

58

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

2.

Tripping logic 2

IP>0.06In
SOTF for reclosing manually

&

Trip phase A, B and C

SOTF for auto-reclosing

1-pole tripping and not dropping off
1

Op_Perisist1P
1

Op_ROC2
&
[En_ROC2_Blk_AR]

Op_ROC3
&
[En_ROC3_Blk_AR]
Op_ROC4
Op_BFP1
1
Op_BFP2
1

Op_InvROC
Op_OC_VTS

Op_3P_RecvTT
Op_Z2 (Phase-to-phase)
&
[En_ZPP2_Blk_AR]

Op_Z2 (Phase-to-ground)
&
[En_ZPG2_Blk_AR]
Op_Z3
Op_Z_Rev
Op_OC1
&
[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR]

Op_OC2
&
[En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR]
Op_OC3
EBI_Lockout
1
PD and protection element operating

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

59

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.

60

Blocking AR logic

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

SOTF for reclosing manually
1
SOTF for auto-reclosing
1-pole tripping and not dropping off

1
1

Op_Perisist1P
Op_OC1
&
[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR]

Op_OC2
&
[En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR]
Op_OC3
[En_ZPP2_Blk_AR]
&
Op_Z2 (Phase-to-phase)
[En_ZPG2_Blk_AR]

1
&

Op_Z2 (Phase-to-ground)

Op_Z3
Op_Z_Rev
[En_ROC2_Blk_AR]
&
Op_ROC2

[En_ROC3_Blk_AR]
&
Op_ROC3
Op_ROC4
Op_InvROC

Op_3P_RecvTT

Op_OC_VTS
Op_BFP1

1
1

Op_BFP2
PD and protection element operating
&

Initiating blocking relay for AR

[En_PDP_Blk_AR]
[En_PhSF_Blk_AR]
&
Op_PhSelFail
[EBI_Lockout]

Blocking AR

VT circuit failure

Tripping Logic of PCS-931:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

61

Chapter 3 Protection Description

1.

Minimal operating time of the contact is 40ms.

2.

DPFC distance protection, zone 1 of distance protection and current differential protection
operate to implement selective tripping by phase selection element.

3.

Zone 2 of distance protection operates to trip three-phase circuit breaker and block AR when
logic setting [En_ZPP2_Blk_AR] or [En_ZPG2_Blk_AR] is set as 1 for phase-to-phase fault
or phase-to-ground fault respectively.

4.

Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase

circuit breaker and block AR when logic setting [En_ROC2_Blk_AR] is set as 1

5.

Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase

circuit breaker and block AR when logic setting [En_ROC3_Blk_AR] is set as 1

6.

Stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase circuit breaker
and block AR when logic setting [En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR]

7.

Stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase circuit breaker
and block AR when logic setting [En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR]

8.

If phase selection element fails and operation element cannot drop off, three-pole tripping
command caused by phase selection failure will be sent after 200ms delay.

9.

If any of the following conditions is matched, three-phase tripping signal will be sent directly.

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

Zone 3 of distance protection operating

Reversal distance protection operating

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating

Breaker failure protection operating

Switching onto a faulty phase

A fault occurs under pole disagreement condition.

Overcurrent element operating during VT circuit failure

Phase selection failure after 200ms delay

Single phase tripping failure after 150ms delay

Single phase operation condition after 200ms delay

10. Three-phase tripping will be used if two or three phases are selected by the phase selection
element.
11. Any fault occurs under following conditions, three-pole trip element will operate
62

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

The logic setting [En_3PTrip] is set as 1

The binary input [EBI_Lockout] is energized

Auto-reclosing is not ready for operating

3-pole auto-reclosing is adopted

12. When a serious fault occurs, auto-reclosing will be blocked under following conditions:

Manual reclosing or auto-reclosing onto a fault phase

1-pole tripping and not dropping off

3-pole tripping during single phase operation

Tripping for VT circuit failure

Tripping for three-phase fault

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

Zone 3 of distance protection operating

Reversal distance protection operating

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating

Breaker failure protection operating

13. Three-pole trip with auto-reclosing blocked can be selected

[En_PhSF_Blk_AR], [En_PDF_Blk_AR] and [En_MPF_Blk_AR].

by

logic

setting

3.13 Synchronism Check

3.13.1 Overview
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between
systems at both sides, larger impact will be led to the system during reclosing. In addition, the
automatic reclosure is applied with the synchronism check to avoid this situation and improve the
system stability. The synchronism check logic can control the reclosing by checking if the voltage
of the bus and the line at both sides of the circuit breaker is synchronous or the no-voltage
condition is met. The synchronism check logic includes checking the voltage difference, phase
difference and frequency difference of the voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker.

3.13.2 Function Description

The synchronism check is used to check conditions at both sides of the circuit breaker and
compare them with the settings [phi_Diff_SynChk], [f_Diff_SynChk] and [V_Diff_SynChk]. If all
synchronism check conditions are met, the synchronism check conditions can be outputted.
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

63

Chapter 3 Protection Description

The no-voltage check is used to measure the amplitude of line voltage or busbar voltage at both
sides of the circuit breaker; after that, compare it with the voltage setting [V_Live] and the
no-voltage setting [V_Dead]; when the measured result is consistent with the setting, the
no-voltage check conditions can be outputted.

3.13.3 Logic Scheme

The logic diagram gives the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
no-voltage check.
3.13.3.1 Synchronism Check

When the frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages of both sides
of the circuit breaker is calculated in the protective device, they can be used as input conditions of
the synchronism check. If the compared voltages at both sides of the circuit breaker are different,
such as, the bus voltage is phase-to-phase voltage and the line voltage is the phase voltage, it is
required to carry out the calculation after the bus voltage has been compensated as the phase
voltage.
The logic setting [En_SynChk_AR] is used to determine whether the synchronism check function
is enabled. When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltage meets the
requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, it is regarded
that the synchronism check conditions are met.

Figure 3.13-1 Synchronism check of automatic reclosure

Where:
[En_SynChk_AR]: Logic setting for enabling synchronism check
UDiffVoltage difference between busbar voltage and line voltage
FreqDiffFrequency difference between busbar voltage and line voltage
PhaseDiffPhase difference between busbar voltage and line voltage
ULineHigh: Live Line
UBusHigh: Live Bus
3.13.3.2 Voltage Check

The no-voltage check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,
64

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be
enabled and disabled by logic settings [En_LvB_DdL_AR], [En_DdB_LvL_AR] and
[En_DdB_DdL_AR] respectively. The protection can calculate the measured bus voltage and line
voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with the voltage setting [V_Live] and
no-voltage setting [V_Dead], when the voltage is higher than the voltage setting [V_Live], the
voltage conditions are established; when the voltage is lower than the no-voltage setting [V_Dead],
the no-voltage conditions are established.
[En_DdB_DdL_AR]
&

[En_LvB_DdL_AR]
&

[t_VoltChk]

VolChk OK

[En_DdB_LvL_AR]
&

ULineLow
ULineHigh
UBusHigh
UBusLow
VT circuit abnormal

Figure 3.13-2 Voltage check scheme of automatic reclosure

Where:
[En_LvB_DdL_AR]: Logic setting for enabling dead-line and live-bus check
[En_DdB_LvL_AR]: Logic setting for enabling dead-bus and live-line check
[En_DdB_DdL_AR]: Logic setting for enabling dead-line and dead-bus check
ULineLow: Dead Line
UBusLow: Dead Bus
Alm_CTS: VT circuit is abnormal
The voltage check function shall be blocked if the VT circuit is abnormal.

3.14 Automatic Reclosure

3.14.1 Overview
To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, protective relays are
installed on the transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances.
Faults caused by lightning, wind, or tree branches could be temporary in nature and may

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

65

Chapter 3 Protection Description

disappear once the circuit is de-energized. Automatic reclosing systems are put into place to
re-energize and restore the faulted section of the transmission system once the fault is
extinguished (providing it is a temporary fault). For certain transmission systems, reclosing is used
to improve system stability by restoring critical transmission paths as soon as possible.

3.14.2 Function Description

The automatic reclosure can be enabled or disabled by means of the logic setting [En_AR] or the
binary inputs [EBI_Opt1_AR] and [EBI_Opt1_AR] via switch on the panel. The protective device
provides one shot automatic reclosure, including the 1-pole, 3-pole and 1/3-pole auto-reclosing.
The reclosing mode is determined by internal logic setting or external binary inputs.
When the 3-pole or 1/3-pole auto-reclosing mode is selected, the following three types of check
modes can be selected: no-voltage check, synchronism check and no check.
3.14.2.1 AR Ready

Before the reclaim time begins, the following conditions must be met:
1.

The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal

2.

The circuit breaker is on closed state before fault occurrence

3.

There is no block signal of automatic reclosure

Under normal conditions, if there is the signal input of low pressure, the automatic reclosure will
discharge with the time delay of 200ms. If there is the signal input of low pressure after the circuit
breaker tripping, the automatic reclosure will not discharge.
CB Closed

[t_CBClsd_AR]

Get Ready Logic

[BI_LowPres_AR]
AR Inprogress
Any trip
AR ON

AR Ready

&
AR Block element

Figure 3.14-1 Get ready scheme of AR

AR Ready shows that the circuit breaker is able to execute one-shot auto-reclosing.
AR Lock element is the block element of automatic reclosure. If one of following conditions is met,
the automatic reclosure will be blocked.

Block input signal

Manual tripping

The tripping coil or closing coil of the circuit breaker is unhealthy

SOTF protection operating

66

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

The single-phase reclosing when permanent earthing fault

Phase-to-phase zone 2 of distance protection operates and logic setting [En_ZPP2_Blk_AR]
is set as 1
Phase-to-ground zone 2 of distance protection operates and logic setting [En_ZPG2_Blk_AR]
is set as 1
Zone 3 of distance element operates
Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates and logic setting
[En_ROC2_Blk_AR] is set as 1
Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates and logic setting
[En_ROC3_Blk_AR] is set as 1
Stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates and logic setting
[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR] is set as 1
Stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates and logic setting
[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR] is set as 1

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operates

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates

Reversal distance element operating

Breaker failure protection operating

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

fault phase selection fails and logic setting [En_PhSF_Blk_AR] is set as 1

pole disagreement with fault and logic setting [En_PDP_Blk_AR] is set as 1

multi-phase fault happens, and logic setting [En_MPF_Blk_AR] is set as 1

three-phase fault happens when logic setting [En_3PF_Blk_AR] is set as 1

The check conditions are not met yet till the incomplete sequence time expires

3.14.2.2 Initiation

When the system is applied with the 1-pole reclosing or the 1/3-pole reclosing, the 1-pole reclosing
will be active during the single phase fault. When only the single phase is tripped, that is, when the
device receives the single phase tripping contact and the contact drops off to initiate 1-pole
reclosing condition, the 1-pole reclosing will be initiated. If the three-phase are tripped or the
three-phase 52b are energized, the 1-pole reclosing shall not be initiated.
Generally, the auto-reclosing is initiated by the tripping signal from line protection, and this
initiating signal can be the interior tripping logic or the exterior tripping command. When there is
the tripping command, it can be kept in the device, and the automatic reclosure will be initiated
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

67

Chapter 3 Protection Description

after the tripping command drops off.

Reset Logic
&

Single-phase Trip
1

&

1-pole AR Initiation

&

3-pole AR Initiation

Any trip
3-pole AR Initiate
1-pole AR
CB Ready
Reset Logic
&

Three-phase Trip
1

Any trip
3-pole AR
CB Ready

Figure 3.14-2 1-pole and 3-pole scheme logic of auto-reclosing

3.14.2.3 Reclosing

When the time of the reclosing expires, as far as the 3-pole reclosing, if the synchronism check is
enabled, the reclosing signal shall be determined whether is issued or not based on the result of
synchronism check. When the synchronism check function is disabled, the synchronism check will
be established always. With regard to the 1-pole reclosing, the result of synchronism check will not
be judged, and the reclosing signal will be directly outputted after delay time is used up.
The reclosing pulse width of the automatic reclosure can be set through the setting [t_PW_AR].
With regard to the circuit breaker without the anti-pump circuit, the adjustment function of the
reclosing pulse width can be enabled. Namely, when the tripping occurs during the reclosing, the
reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent reclosing into the fault over and over
when the minimum reclosing pulse width is not lower than 50ms.
After the reclosing command is sent and the automatic reclosure can reset after the time delay
[t_Reclaim_AR], the another reclosing can be conducted.

68

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.14-3 Reclosing scheme

With regard to the temporary fault, after the reclosing command is sent and the automatic
reclosure can reset after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR], the another reclosing can be conducted.
With regard to the permanent fault, after the reclosing pulse has been sent, if the protection
tripping signal has been received, or after the reclosing pulse has been sent and with the time
delay [t_Unsuc_AR], the circuit breaker is not closed, which will be regarded as the reclosing into
the permanent fault. The device will send failure signal of reclosing (AR Unsuccessful), which will
last 200ms only.

1
AR Pulse

&

[t_Unsuc_AR]

CB closed

200ms

AR Unsuccess

AR Ready
&
Any trip

Figure 3.14-4 Reclosing unsuccessful

3.15 Transfer Trip And Transfer Signal

PCS-931 can exchange not only current but also binary inputs via communication channel
between two ends of line.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

69

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.15.1 Transfer Trip

TX

RX

Transfer trip is the sending of a trip signal via a communication channel to the remote end of
transmission line. It is very reliable due to using of dedicated byte compensation check and bit
compensation check during transferring binary input. For the local end, when binary input
[BI_Send_TT] is energized, a trip signal will be sent to the remote end. For the remote end, when
such a trip signal received, the state of binary input [BI_RecvTT] will change from 0 to 1. The
trip signal will result in tripping directly when logic setting [En_FD_Ctrl_TT] set as 0, or with the
guard of general fault detector element when logic setting [En_FD_Ctrl_TT] set as 1, at the same
time auto-reclosing will be locked out.

BI

Optical fibre
Transfer trip

TJB-1

BO

TJC-1

TX

RX

TJA-1

Transfer trip

+DC

PCS-931

PCS-931

Figure 3.15-1 The sketch diagram of transfer trip

3.15.2 Transfer signal

TX

+DC

Optical fibre

Transfer signal 1

RX

Besides the tripping signal, other signals can also be sent to remote end via communication
channel between. For the local end, when binary input [BI_Send1_TS] or [BI_Send2_TS] is
energized, a binary signal will be sent to the remote end. For the remote end, when such a binary
signal is received, the status of binary input [VBI_RecvTS1] or [VBI_RecvTS2] will change from 0
to 1, and corresponding binary output contacts of BO module will close.

YC1-1
BO
YC1-2

Transfer signal 1
TX

Transfer signal 2

Transfer signal 2

RX

BI
YC2-1
BO
YC2-2

PCS-931

PCS-931

Figure 3.15-2 The sketch diagram of transfer signal

70

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.1 General Description
Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. When
equipment is in energizing process before the LED HEALTHY is on, the equipment need to be
checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the
health of the protection system when startup and during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a fault is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the equipment,
the equipment will be blocked out, which means relay is out of service. Therefore you must
re-energize the relays to make relay back into service.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. At the same time event recording will record the failure alarm
which can be viewed in event recording report and be printed.

4.2 Understand the Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation condition of the equipment are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.
A common abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other
functions can still work. However, if serious hardware failure or abnormality were detected, all
protection functions will be blocked and the LED HEALTHY will be extinguished and blocking
signal will be given by contacts output BSJ. The protective device then cannot work normally and
maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.
Note!

If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnose record. If the reason cannot be found at site,
please notice the factory NARI-RELAYS. Please Do not simply press button TARGET
RESET on the protection panel or re-power on the protective device.
Table 4.2-1 List of alarms information
No.

Item

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

LED
HEALTHY

ALARM

VT ALARM

Block Relay

71

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

No.

Item

LED
HEALTHY

ALARM

VT ALARM

Block Relay

Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON

YES

Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU

YES

Alm_TrpOut

YES

Alm_Setting

YES

Alm_VTS

Alm_PersistI0

Alm_PersistFD

Alm_VTS_Ux

Alm_CTS

10

Alm_52b

11

Alm_Pwr_Opto

12

Alm_ExTrp_BI

13

Alm_DSP_CPU

YES

14

Alm_DSP_MON

YES

15

Alm_ID_ChA

16

Alm_ChA

17

Alm_NoValidFram_ChA

18

Alm_CRC_ChA

19

Alm_OutDiffP_ChA

20

Alm_Diff_ChA

21

Alm_CompParam_ChA

22

Alm_TT

23

Alm_Connect_ChA

24

Alm_EquipConfig

25

Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope

26

Alm_BoardConfig

27

Alm_SynChkFail_AR

28

GAlm_NetStorm_NetA

29

GAlm_NetStorm_NetB

30

GAlm_Disc_NetA

31

GAlm_Disc_NetB

32

GAlm_CfgUnmatch

33

GAlm_NetA_GOOSExx

34

GAlm_NetB_GOOSExx

35

GAlm_CfgUnmatch_GOOSExx

YES

: means the corresponding LED indicator is on

Xx: from 00 to 11
Table 4.2-2 Repairmen suggestion for alarms information
No.
72

Item

Handing suggestion
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

No.

Item

Handing suggestion

Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON

Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it

Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU

Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it

Alm_TrpOut

Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it

Alm_Setting

Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it

Alm_VTS

Check secondary voltage circuit

Alm_PersistI0

Check secondary current circuit

Alm_PersistFD

Check secondary current circuit

Alm_VTS_Ux

Check secondary voltage circuit

Alm_CTS

Check secondary current circuit

10

Alm_52b

Check binary input [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and

[BI_52b_Phc]

11

Alm_Pwr_Opto

Check DC power supply in the BI module

12

Alm_ExTrp_BI

Check binary input [BI_TrpA_Other], [BI_TrpB_Other],

[BI_TrpC_Other],
[BI_Trp3P_Line]
and
[BI_Trp3P_G/T]

13

Alm_DSP_CPU

Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it

14

Alm_DSP_MON

Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it

15

Alm_ID_ChA

Check the setting [ID_Local] and [ID_Remote] of

protective device in the both ends

16

Alm_ChA

Check communication channel

17

Alm_NoValidFram_ChA

Check communication channel

18

Alm_CRC_ChA

Check communication channel

19

Alm_OutDiffP_ChA

Check communication channel

20

Alm_Diff_ChA

Check whether the route of communication channel is

the same in both directions, and check CT circuit

21

Alm_CompParam_ChA

Check the setting [XC1] and [XC0] and differential

current of protection device

22

Alm_TT

Check binary input [BI_Send_TT] of protection device

in the both ends

23

Alm_Connect_ChA

Check the connection of optical fibre channel

24

Alm_EquipConfig

Please check the GOOSE configuration file (i.e.

GOOSE.txt) or inform manufacture or agency to
maintain it

25

Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope

Check the setting whether its value is out of scope

26

Alm_BoardConfig

Check the plug-in module or inform manufacture or

agency to maintain it

27

Alm_SynChkFail_AR

Prompting message

28

GAlm_NetStorm_NetA

29

GAlm_NetStorm_NetB

30

GAlm_Disc_NetA

31

GAlm_Disc_NetB

32

GAlm_CfgUnmatch

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Please check the related switches

Please check the network.
Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the
73

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

No.

Item

Handing suggestion

network.
33

GAlm_NetA_GOOSExx

34

GAlm_NetB_GOOSExx

35

GAlm_CfgUnmatch_GOOSExx

Please check the network. (xx: from 00 to 11)

Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the
network. (xx: from 00 to 11)

The following binary signals are only thought as a kind of report stored in the self-supervision
report. They do not need to handle and are only used for commissioning and test.
No.
1

Item
BO_BlkAR

Description

Blocking auto-reclosing

BO_Fail_AR

Auto-reclosing is failure

BO_Inprog_AR

Initiating auto-reclosing

BO_Lockout

Blocking auto-reclosing

4.3 Relay Self-supervision

4.3.1 Fault Detection Check
When the zero sequence general fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an
alarm [Alm_PersistI0] will be issued without the protective device blocked.
When any general fault detector picks up for longer than 10s, an alarm will be issued
[Alm_PersistFD] without the protective device blocked.

4.3.2 Trip Output Circuit Check

Chips controlling the output relays in the output circuit are continually monitored. If any error or
damage is detected in these chips, alarm [Alm_TrpOut] will be given and the protective device will
be blocked.

4.3.3 Settings Check

PCS-931 series has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of
active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If the settings are checked to be
out-of-scope, an alarm will be issued to. The protective device is blocked. At the same time, if
there is any summation error of all setting groups, an alarm [Alm_Settings] will be issued, the
protective device is also blocked.

4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage and Current Drift Auto Regulation
Zero point of voltage and current may drift influenced by variation of temperature or other
environment factors. The equipment continually automatically traces the drift and adjusts it to
normal value.

74

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.4.2 DSP Sampling Monitoring

AC sampling of DSP chip in DSP module (slot 2) is monitored and if the samples are detected to
be wrong, an alarm [Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU] will be issued and the protective device will be
blocked.
The relay compares the AC sampling of DSP chip between DSP module (slot 2) and DSP module
(slot 3). In normal condition, the sampling should be the same for a certain AC input. If the
sampling value in DSP module (slot 3) is detected to be different largely with that in DSP module
(slot 2), an alarm [Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON] will be issued and the protective device will be
blocked.

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Alm_Pwr_Opto] will be issued.

4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision

If all of the binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are energized ,which
indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no current detected in the line, the line will be
considered to be out of service. SOTF protection will be enabled for 400ms.
If all of the binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are energized that
indicates circuit breaker is open but there is still current detected in the line or three-phase circuit
breaker is in pole disagreement, an alarm signal [Alm_52b] will be issued after 10 seconds.

4.5.3 Bus VT Circuit Supervision

The purpose of the voltage transformer circuit failure supervision function is to indicate failure in
the measuring voltage from a voltage transformer. When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of
the voltage transformer (VT), the voltage dependent measuring elements may operate incorrectly.
PCS-931 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTS) as a count measure against such
incorrect operation.
In normal operation program of the PCS-931, the phasor summation of bus three phase voltage is
checked frequently, if this phasor summation detected is higher than 8.8V and fault detection
element does not operate, VTS will, after 1.25s, output an alarm [Alm_VTS].
If the phasor summation detected is lower than 8.8V but the bus positive voltage U1 is less than
36.7V, VTS will also issue an alarm [Alm_VTS] after 1.25s when logic setting [En_LineVT] is set as
0, otherwise, VTS will also issue an alarm [Alm_VTS] after 1.25s when circuit breaker is closed
(all of the binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are de-energized) or there
is current existing on line.
When VT circuit failure is detected, the protection device will implement the following tasks
automatically.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

75

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

1.

disable distance protection

2.

enable phase overcurrent protection and zero-sequence overcurrent protection for VT circuit
failure

3.

disable stage 1, 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

4.

disable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection when the logic setting
[En_Dir_ROC3] is set as 1

5.

disable direction controlled element of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

6.

disable direction controlled element of stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection

7.

disable direction controlled element of directional phase overcurrent protection

8.

disable auto-reclosing

9.

to increase the threshold of DPFC distance element to 1.5UN

The alarm [Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically with a time delay of 10s after all three phases
voltage resume to normal condition.

4.5.4 Line VT Circuit Supervision

If the line voltage is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or dead line check, the line voltage is
monitored.
If the line circuit breaker is in close state which is indicated by binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha],
[BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc], but the line voltage is lower than the setting [V_Dead], it means
that line VT circuit fails and an alarm [Alm_VTS_Ux] will be issued after 10s.
If auto-reclosing is disabled, or auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check and voltage
check are not enabled, line voltage is not needed to be connected and line VT circuit supervision
will be disabled.
When line VT circuit failure is detected, the function of synchronism check and dead line check of
auto-reclosing will be disabled automatically.
After line voltage resumes to normal condition, the alarm and its subsequences will be reset
automatically after 10s.

4.5.5 CT Circuit Supervision

The main purpose of the current transformer (CT) circuit failure supervision function is to detect
faults in the secondary circuits of CT and avoid influence on the operation of corresponding
protection functions. This function will be processed all the time, whether general fault detection
picks up or not.
The equipment measures zero sequence current from two sources, which is either calculated
depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC) or derived at the neutral current circuit
from three-phase currents (3I0).
76

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

If 3I0 is less than 0.75 times 3I0Cal or 3I0Cal is less than 0.75 times 3I0, after 200 ms, an alarm
[Alm_CTS] will be issued.
If 3I0Cal exists (3I0>0.1In) but 3U0Cal derived is nearly zero (3U0Cal<3V) and there is a phase whose
current is zero at least, after 10s, an alarm [Alm_CTS] will be issued.
When CT circuit failure is detected, the protection device will implement the following tasks
automatically.
1.

disable zero-sequence overcurrent element

2.

disable stage 1, 2, 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

3.

disable inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

4.

disable direction controlled element of stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection

3U0Cal: zero-sequence voltage calculated depending on the summation of UA, UB and UC. (i.e.,
3U0Cal=UA+UB+UC)

4.5.6 Binary Input Supervision

If any of the binary inputs [BI_TrpA_Other], [BI_TrpB_Other], [BI_TrpC_Other], [BI_Trp3P_Line]
and [BI_Trp3P_G/T] is energized for longer than 10s, the alarm [Alm_ExTrp_BI] will be issued.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

77

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

78

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5.1 Metering
PCS-931 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The relay samples
24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS value in each interval and updated the LCD display in
every 0.5 second. The measurement data can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or
on the local via tool software or remote PC. Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through
LCD screen.
1.

RMS Values

Measured directly

Magnitude of phase voltage (Ua, Ub, Uc)

Magnitude of synchronism voltage (Ux)

Magnitude of zero-sequence voltage (3U0)

Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)

Magnitude of zero-sequence current (3I0 directly measured from CT circuit)

Received via optic fibre channel

Phase current from the remote end via optical fibre channel A (Ia_Rmt_ChA, Ib_Rmt_ChA,
Ic_Rmt_ChA)

Calculated by DSP

Differential current compensated by capacitive current of optical fibre channel A

(Ida_comp_ChA, Idb_comp_ChA, Idc_comp_ChA)
Differential current not compensated by capacitive current of optical fibre channel A
(Ida_Uncomp_ChA, Idb_Uncomp_ChA, Idc_Uncomp_ChA)

Frequency of line voltage (f_Line)

Frequency of busbar voltage (f_Bus)

Access path: Press key to enter main menu firstly. Select the item VALUES and press key
ENT to enter submenu CPU_METERING, and then press key ENT. The corresponding
metering values mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.
2.

Phase angle

Measured directly

Phase angle of phase voltage (Ang(Ua), Ang(Ub), Ang(Uc))

Phase angle of synchronism voltage (Ang(Ux))

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

79

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

Phase angle of phase current (Ang(Ia), Ang(Ib), Ang(Ic))

Received via optic fibre channel

Phase angle between local phase current not compensated by capacitive current and remote
phase current not compensated by capacitive current (Ang(Ia-Iar), Ang(Ib-Ibr), Ang(Ic-Icr))

Phase angle between local phase current compensated by capacitive current and remote
phase current compensated by capacitive current (Ang(Ia-Iar)_Comp, Ang(Ib-Ibr)_Comp,
Ang(Ic-Icr)_Comp)

In PHASE_ANGLE, the phase angles displayed by three-phase current and three-phase voltage
are based on Phase A voltage.
No.

Definition

Ang(Ua)

Phase angle difference for phase-A voltage (Ua) relative to phase-A

voltage (Ua)

Ang(Ub)

Phase angle difference for phase-B voltage (Ub) relative to phase-A

voltage (Ua)

Ang(Uc)

Phase angle difference for phase-C voltage (Uc) relative to phase-A

voltage (Ua)

Ang(Ux)

Phase angle difference for synchronism voltage (Ux) relative to

phase-A voltage (Ua)

Ang(Ia)

Phase angle difference for phase-A current (Ia) relative to phase-A

voltage (Ua)

Ang(Ib)

Phase angle difference for phase-B current (Ib) relative to phase-A

voltage (Ua)

Ang(Ic)

Phase angle difference for phase-C current (Ic) relative to phase-A

voltage (Ua)

Ang(Ia-Iar)

Phase angle difference for the local phase-A current (Ia) relative to
the remote phase-A current (Iar) (not compensated by capacitive
current)

Ang(Ib-Ibr)

Phase angle difference for the local phase-B current (Ib) relative to
the remote phase-B current (Ibr) (not compensated by capacitive
current)

Ang(Ic-Icr)

Phase angle difference for the local phase-C current (Ic) relative to
the remote phase-C current (Icr) (not compensated by capacitive
current)

11

Ang(Ia-Iar)_Comp

Phase angle difference for the local phase-A current (Ia) relative to
the remote phase-A current (Iar) (compensated by capacitive
current)

12

Ang(Ib-Ibr)_Comp

Phase angle difference for the local phase-B current (Ib) relative to
the remote phase-B current (Ibr) (compensated by capacitive
current)

10

80

Symbol

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

13

Ang(Ic-Icr)_Comp

Phase angle difference for the local phase-C current (Ic) relative to
the remote phase-C current (Icr) (compensated by capacitive
current)

Access path: Press key to enter main menu firstly. Select the item VALUES and press key
ENT to enter submenu PHASE_ANGLE, and then press key ENT. The corresponding phase
angles mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.

5.2 Event & Fault Record

5.2.1 General Description
The PCS-931 series provides the following recording functions:
1.

Event recorder

2.

Disturbance recorder

3.

Present recorder

These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
Navigate the menu to view the report through LCD screen.

5.2.2 Event Recorder

5.2.2.1 General Description

The protective device can store the latest 1024 tripping report, the latest 1024 binary input change
report, the latest 1024 self-supervision report and the latest 1024 control report respectively. All
the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available space is exhausted, the
oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
5.2.2.2 Tripping Report

When any protection element operating or drop out, such as fault detector, distance protection and
so on, they will be logged in event recorder.
5.2.2.3 Self-supervision Report

The protective device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or
abnormal condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged
in event recorder.
5.2.2.4 Binary Input Change Report

When there is binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from 0 to 1
or from 1 to 0, it will be logged as an event recorder.
5.2.2.5 Control Report

If operator implements some operation, such as reboot protective device, modify setting, and so
on, they will be logged as an event recorder.
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

81

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5.2.3 Disturbance Recorder

5.2.3.1 Application

Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis
of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.
5.2.3.2 Design

Disturbance recorder is consisted of fault report and fault waveform. Disturbance recorder is
initiated by fault detector element.
Disturbance recorder has two types:
1.

Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element

2.

Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.

5.2.3.3 Capacity and Information of Fault Report

The protective device can store up to 64 fault reports with waveform in non-volatile memory. If a
new fault occurs when 64 faults report have been stored, the oldest fault report will be overwritten
by the latest one.
For each fault report, the following items are included:
1.

Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2.

Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via GPS if connected.
Initiating date and time is when a protective fault detection operates.
3.

Relative operating time

An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the report.
4.

Faulty phase

5.

Fault location

To get accurate result of fault location, the following settings shall be set correctly:
1)

Positive-sequence line reactance [X1L]

2)

Positive-sequence line resistance [R1L]

3)

Zero-sequence line reactance [X0L]

4)

Zero-sequence line resistance [R0L]

82

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5)

Line length in km [LineLength]

6.

protection elements

For the details of designation of each protective element

5.2.3.4 Fault Waveform Record Capacity and Information

MON module can store 64 fault waveform in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when 64
fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform pre-fault and 14-cycle waveform after fault
detector pickup, and this 16-cycle waveform is high-frequency recording at a rate of 1200Hz (24
points per cycle). If no protection element operates, after the above 16-cycle waveform recording
is finished, the protection device will switch into low-frequency recording at a rate of 50Hz (only
magnitude). If some protection element operates, 14-cycle waveform after protection operation will
be recorded which are high-frequency recording waveform. When the protection device is not in
high-frequency recording state, it will switch into low-frequency recording state automatically. If the
total 1024 points are recorded, this recording waveform is finished.
The sampling rate of high-frequency recording is 24 points per cycle and that of low-frequency
recording is 1 point per cycle to record RMS magnitude of current or voltage.

5.2.4 Present Recording

Present recording is used to record a piece of waveform of present operation equipment which
can be trigger manually on LCD of equipment or remotely through auxiliary software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before and 14-cycle waveform after triggering, and
this 16-cycle waveform is high-frequency recording waveform. Then the protection device will
switch into low-frequency recording. Each piece of present recording waveform will occupy the
memory room of a piece of disturbance recording waveform, and triggering present recording will
be logged as a piece of fault report.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

83

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

84

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.1 General Description
PCS-931 series is made of a 4U height 19 chassis for panel flush mounting. Components
mounted on its front include a 320240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and
a 9 pin connector for communication with PC. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the
equipment for these functions. Shown as Figure 6.1-1 front view of PCS-931.

xx

VT ALARM

xx

AR READY

xx

CH A ALARM

xx

CH B ALARM

xx

TRIP A

xx

TRIP B

xx

TRIP C

xx

RECLOSE

xx

PCS - 931
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY

ENT
ESC

xx

ALARM

GR
P

HEALTHY

Figure 6.1-1 Front view of PCS-931

The 10 defined LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), VT circuit
supervision (VT ALARM) self-supervision (ALARM), auto-reclosing reclaimed (AR READY),
channel supervision (CH A ALARM, CH B ALARM), protection operates (TRIP A, TRIP B and
TRIP C), auto-reclosing operates (RECLOSE).
As to buttons of the keypad, ENT is enter, GRP is group number and ESC is escape.
NR1102C

NR1123E

NR1123D

TX

NR1403

NR1502

NR1550

NR1551

NR1551

NR1560

NR1301
5V

BJ

BJJ BSJ

DANGER

1 COM1
2
3

BSJ1
BJJ1

4 COM2

RX

BSJ2

BJJ2

24V

8 24VGND
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR12 FGND

Figure 6.1-2 Rear view of PCS-931 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary output)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

85

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1102C NR1123G

NR1123F

NR1126A

TX
RX

NR1502

NR1301
5V

BJ

BJJ BSJ

TX

TX

RX

RX
TX
1 COM1

TX

RX

2
3

BSJ1
BJJ1

4 COM2

RX

BSJ2

BJJ2

24V

8 24VGND
9

ETHERNET1

10 PWR+
11 PWR12 FGND

ETHERNET2

Figure 6.1-3 Rear view of PCS-931 (ECVT and GOOSE binary output)
According to output method and sampling method of the protection device, output method
including conventional binary output and GOOSE binary output, and sampling method including
conventional CT/VT and ECVT (electronic current and voltage transformer), PCS-900 series
provide standard modules and optional module for different protection device.
Table 6.1-1 Hardware configuration
No.

ID

Name

Function Description

Remark

NR1102

MON

Communication interface

standard module

NR1123

DSP

Protection function calculation

standard module

NR1123

DSP

Fault detector logic calculation

standard module

NR1403

AI

Analog current and voltage input

optional module

NR1126

GOOSE

GOOSE signal input and output

optional module

NR1502

BI

Binary input via opto-coupler

standard module

NR1502

BI

Binary input via opto-coupler

optional module

NR1552

BO

Binary output (signal or trip)

standard module

NR1551

BO

Binary output (signal or trip)

optional module

10

NR1560

BO

Binary output (signal or trip)

optional module

11

NR1301

PWR

DC power supply

standard module

6.2 Typical Wiring

1.

86

Sampling circuit adopting conventional CT/VT

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

A

*
52b

409

410

411

412

413

414

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

Ua

Ub

Uc

Un

Ux

Ux'

Ia

Ia'

Ib

Ib'

Ic

Ic'

I0

I0'

Current Input

Voltage Input
AI Module

ETHERNET 1

001

COMMON1

002

BSJ-1

003

BJJ-1

004

COMMON2

005

BSJ-2

006

BJJ-2

007

24V OPTO+

008

24V OPTO-

PC

HMI

GND

103

RS485A

104

RS485B

105

GND

106

RS485A

107

RS485B

108

GND

109

RS232R

110

RS232T

111

GROUND

112

010

220/110V DC+

011

220/110V DC-

012

GROUND

GPS

DC

102

COM2

009

101

RS485B

MON Module

LCD
KEYPAD

RS485A
COM1

PWR Module

To BI
Module

ETHERNET 2

Serial Port
PTINTER

GROUND BUS

DB 9

PTR

RS232

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-931 (adopting conventional CT/VT)

Typical wiring of PCS-931 which adopts conventional CT/VT is shown in Figure 6.2-1.

2.

Sampling circuit adopting ECVT

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

87

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

A
B

ECVTRemote Module

Phase C

Phase B

Phase A

Merging Unit
RX

RX

TX

TX

Receiving sampling data through multi-mode optical fibre from merging unit
TX

RX

TX

RX

FO transmitting

FO Receiving

FO transmitting

FO Receiving

DSP Module

DSP Module
ETHERNET 1

001

COMMON1

002

BSJ-1

003

BJJ-1

RS485A

101

004

COMMON2

RS485B

102

005

BSJ-2

GND

103

006

BJJ-2

RS485A

104

007

24V OPTO+

RS485B

105

008

24V OPTO-

GND

106

RS485A

107

RS485B

108

PC

To BI
Module

ETHERNET 2

LCD
KEYPAD

009

DC

010

220/110V DC+

011

220/110V DC-

012

GROUND

RS232
GROUND BUS

GND

109

RS232R

110

RS232T

111

GROUND

112

Serial Port

DB 9

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-931 (adopting ECVT)

Typical wiring of PCS-931 which adopts ECVT is shown in Figure 6.2-2.

In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT), the merging
unit will merge the sample data from ECVT, and then send it to the protection device through
multi-mode optical fibre. The double DSP modules (NR1123) of protection device receive the data

88

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

from merging unit respectively through the optical-fibre interface to complete the protection
function calculation and fault detector logic calculation.
The difference between the hardware platform based on ECVT and the hardware platform based
on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sample data only, and the protective device
receives the sampling data of merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.

6.3 Plug-in Modules

The protection device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and
the major characteristics of the new platform include high reliability, great capability in
anti-interference, intellectualization and networking. See Figure 6.3-1 for hardware diagram.

Conventional CT/VT

A/D

Opto-coupler

External
Binary Input

DSP
ECVT
Output
Relay

Conventional CT/VT

A/D
DSP

ECVT

QDJ

ETHERNET
LCD/Power Supply

PRINT
CPU

GPS

+E
SERIAL PORT

Figure 6.3-1 Hardware diagram

6.3.1 MON Module

The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete
device, human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

89

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1102C

NR1102D

ETHERNET 1

ETHERNET 1

FO 1

NR1102H

ETHERNET 2

FO 2

RX

To SAS
ETHERNET 2

TX

TX

FO 1

RX

To SAS

TX

FO 2

RX

To SAS
ETHERNET 3

NR1102I
TX

ETHERNET 1

ETHERNET 1

To SAS
ETHERNET 4

To SAS

ETHERNET 2

ETHERNET 2

SYN+

01

SYN+

01

SYN+

01

SYN+

01

SYN-

02

SYN-

02

SYN-

02

SYN-

02

SHLD

03

SHLD

03

SHLD

03

SHLD

03

GND

04

GND

04

GND

04

GND

04

RTS

05

RTS

05

RTS

05

RTS

05

TXD

06

TXD

06

TXD

06

TXD

06

SGND

07

SGND

07

SGND

07

SGND

07

Module ID

To GPS

To PRINT

Memory

To GPS

To PRINT

Interface

To GPS

To PRINT

128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet

Twisted pair wire

NR1102D

128M DDR

4 RJ45 Ethernet

Twisted pair wire

NR1102H

128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

Optical fibre SC

NR1102I

128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

Optical fibre TC
01

485-1B

02

SHLD

03

GND

04

SYN+

01

SYN-

02

SHLD

03

GND

04

RTS

01

TXD

02

SGND

03

GND

04

PRINT

485-1A

GPS

Twisted pair wire

To PRINT

COM

Twisted pair wire

To GPS

Physical Layer

NR1102C

Twisted pair wire

To SAS

RX

Figure 6.3-2 Wiring of communication interface

There are above four types of MON module are optional for PCS-931 and pin definitions are same
except Ethernet ports.

90

Pin No.

Symbol

~01

SYN+

~02

SYN-

~03

SHLD

~04

GND

Description

EIA
RS-485
standardized
interface
for
clock
synchronization, PPS and IRIG-B signals are permitted.
Grounded connection of this protection device
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Pin No.

Symbol

~05

RXD

~06

TXD

~07

SGND

Description

Interface for connecting with a printer, the EPSON

LQ-300K printer is recommended.

The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-2. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to
connect the + and terminals of difference signal; the other pair of twisted pairs are used to
connect the signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices
connected with the bus to the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports; the free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device; it is used
to connect the external shields of the two cables when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of cable shall be grounded at one of the ends.

6.3.2 DSP Module (Protection Function Calculation)

The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, sample data exchanging with the opposite side,
calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.
When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the
real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.
The module can provide 2,048kbit/s or 64kbit/s single-mode optical-fibre to exchange data and
signal with the opposite-side protection device.

6.3.3 DSP Module (Fault Detector Logic Calculation)

The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of general fault detector elements and
providing positive power supply to output relay.
When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the
real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.
The following figure is the type definition for MON module; corresponding module shall be adopted
in accordance with concrete situation.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

91

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Figure 6.3-3 DSP module

Module ID

CT/VT Type

FO Interface

NR1123D

Conventional CT/VT

No

NR1123E

Conventional CT/VT

Yes

NR1123F

Single ECVT

No

NR1123G

Single ECVT

Yes

NR1123K

Double ECVT

No

Remark

Used to multi-breaker, 3/2 breakers

6.3.4 AI Module
The protection device which supports ECVT should not be equipped with this module. The slot
numbers of the module are 4 and 5. The AI module (NR1401) is applicable for the plant or station
with analog VT and CT.
IA, IB, IC and 3I0 are phase current and zero sequence current input to AI module separately with
rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. It is assumed
that forward direction of CT should be pointed from busbar to line.
3I0 derived is used for calculation of zero-sequence directional element and zero-sequence
overcurrent element, but 3I0 measured is used for zero-sequence current fault detector element.
Therefore, 3I0 measured shall be connected to the equipment, otherwise all relevant zero
sequence current protection will be disabled. Because only the magnitude of 3I0 measured is used,
the directionality of 3I0 measured can be forward direction or reverse direction. Maximum linear
range of the current converter is 30In. Table 6.3-1 lists the pin number and its definition of AI
module.

92

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1403

Ia

01

Ian

02

Ib

03

Ibn

04

Ic

05

Icn

06

3I0

07

3I0n

08

Ua

09

Ub

10

Uc

11

Un

12

Ux

13

Uxn

14

GND

15

Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition of AI module

Terminal No.

Definition

Definition

401

Ia

The current of phase A (Polarity mark)

402

Ian

The current of phase A

403

Ib

The current of phase B (Polarity mark)

404

Ibn

The current of phase B

405

Ic

The current of phase C (Polarity mark)

406

Icn

The current of phase C

407

I0

Zero-sequence current (Polarity mark)

408

I0n

Zero-sequence current

409

Ua

The voltage of phase A

410

Ub

The voltage of phase B

411

Uc

The voltage of phase C

412

Un

The voltage of neutral

413

Ux

414

Uxn

415

GND

The synchronism voltage

Ground

UA, UB, and UC are phase voltage used to protection function calculation. Ux is the synchronism
voltage and used for synchronism check, it could be any phase-to-ground voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage, and terminal 213 is the polarity mark. If the auto-reclosing is disabled or
enabled but without any check, the voltage Ux should be disconnected.
The no-voltage check conditions will be met when the line voltage is less than the setting [V_Dead],
and the voltage conditions of synchronism check will be met when the line voltage is more than the
setting [V_Live]. If the automatic reclosure is disabled or the no check for automatic reclosure is
enabled, the line voltage could be disconnected. When the automatic reclosure is enabled and the
no-voltage check and synchronism check is applied, check whether the input voltage is higher
than the setting [V_Dead] during the normal operation of device. If it is, the alarm of VT circuit
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

93

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

failure will be issue with a time delay of 10s and the alarm relay is triggered to work.
Terminal 415 is ground point. It shall be connected to ground bus.

6.3.5 GOOSE Module

This module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, two 100M optical-fibre Ethernet,
two 100M RJ-45 Ethernet and other peripherals. The module supports GOOSE function and IEC
61850-9-1, IEC 61850-9-2 Protocol. Its functions include that the protective device receives data
from the merging unit and sending GOOSE command to the intelligent control device etc. This
module is not required when the GOOSE function is not applied.
The sending and receiving functions of GOOSE should be completed through configuring the
sending module and receiving module.
1.

GOOSE sending function

The protection device can support to configure up to 8 sending modules, and it is recommended to
configure 1 sending module. To facilitate the site debugging, the maximized configuration, i.e. 12
isolator links used for sending function of GOOSE, are available in the protection device. When
corresponding isolator link is open, the associated GOOSE sending information will be reset. Each
GOOSE sending information includes the GOOSE sending information and the state information
of binary input [BI_BlkComm] of the protection device, so as to judge whether the receiving signal
is used effectively at the receiving side. At present, the GOOSE sending information in the
protection device includes the following signals, trip A, trip B, trip C, blocking AR, reclosing,
transfer signal 1, transfer signal 2 and channel alarm. To meet different requirements, 12 isolator
links and various sending information can be combined with each other flexibly, and the
corresponding short address is shown as in the table below:
Signal
Isolator Link

Signal 0

Signal 1

Trip A

Trip B

EBI_Send_GOOSE00

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE01

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE02

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE03

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE04

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE05

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE06

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE07

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE08

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE09

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE10

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN1

EBI_Send_GOOSE11

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN0

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN1

Signal 2

Signal 3

Trip C

Reclosing

Signal
Isolator Link

EBI_Send_GOOSE00
94

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN3

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

EBI_Send_GOOSE01

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE02

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE03

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE04

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE05

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE06

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE07

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE08

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE09

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE10

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN3

EBI_Send_GOOSE11

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN2

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN3

Signal 4

Signal 5

Blocking AR

Transfer trip 1

Signal
Isolator Link

EBI_Send_GOOSE00

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE01

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE02

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE03

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE04

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE05

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE06

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE07

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE08

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE09

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE10

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN5

EBI_Send_GOOSE11

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN4

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN5

Signal 6

Signal 7

Transfer signal 2

Channel alarm

Signal
Isolator Link

EBI_Send_GOOSE00

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE01

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE02

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE03

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE04

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE05

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE06

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE07

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE08

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE09

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE10

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN7

EBI_Send_GOOSE11

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN6

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN7

For example, if the isolator link [EBI_Send_GOOSE01] is defined as the isolator link of tripping
output, the reclosing signal controlled by this isolator shall be configured with the short address
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

95

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN3 in the GOOSE configuration file.

2.

GOOSE receiving function

The protection device supports to configure up to 12 GOOSE receiving modules, and each
receiving module is configured with one virtual enabling binary input setting (VEBI setting) used to
receive. At present, the GOOSE signal supported to receive is shown as follows.
No.
1

GOOSE BI
GBI_Lockout1

Remark

BI via OPTO

Valid BI

GBI_Lockout2

GBI_Lockout3

GBI_Lockout4

GBI_Lockout5

GBI_52b_PhA

7
8
9

GBI_Send_TT1

10

GBI_Send_TT2

11

GBI_Send_TT3

12

GBI_Send_TT4

13

GBI_Send1_TS1

14

GBI_Send1_TS2

15

GBI_Send1_TS3

16

GBI_Send1_TS4

17

GBI_Send2_TS1

18

GBI_Send2_TS2

19

GBI_Send2_TS3

20

GBI_Send2_TS4

21

GBI_TrpA_Other

BI_TrpA_Other_OPT (807)

BI_TrpA_Other

22

GBI_TrpB_Other

BI_TrpB_Other_OPT (811)

BI_TrpB_Other

23

GBI_TrpC_Other

BI_TrpC_Other_OPT (812)

BI_TrpC_Other

24

GBI_3PTrp_Line

BI_3PTrp_Line_OPT (807)

BI_3PTrp_Line

25

GBI_3PTrp_G/T1

26

GBI_3PTrp_G/T2

27

GBI_3PTrp_G/T3

BI_3PTrp_G/T

28

GBI_3PTrp_G/T4

The relation is
BI_3PTrp_G/T_OPT (817)
OR among them

29

GBI_3PTrp_G/T5

30

GBI_LowPres_AR

EBI_Lockout_OPT (810)
The relation is (This binary input is always
EBI_Lockout
OR among them valid no matter whether
GOOSE function is enabled)
BI_52b_PhA_OPT (822)

BI_52b_Pha

GBI_52b_PhB

BI_52b_PhB_OPT (823)

BI_52b_Phb

GBI_52b_PhC

BI_52b_PhC_OPT (824)

BI_52b_Phc

The relation is
BI_Send_TT_OPT (826)
OR among them

BI_Send_TT

The relation is
BI_Send1_TS_OPT (827)
OR among them

BI_Send1_TS

The relation is
BI_Send2_TS_OPT (828)
OR among them

BI_Send2_TS

BI_LowPres_AR_OPT (818) BI_LowPres_AR

To facilitate the site debugging, the GOOSE binary inputs in the table above are the receiving
signal of GOOSE itself. It is necessary to combine with GOOSE VEBI setting of GOOSE receiving,
the state of GOOSE receiving link and the state of binary input [BI_BlkComm] to judge whether the
GOOSE binary input is valid. The concrete relationship is shown as follows:
The received GOOSE valid information=([BI_BlkComm]=1 at both sending end and receiving

96

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

end[BI_BlkComm]=0 at both sending end and receiving end) & GOOSE receiving information &
corresponding GOOSE VEBI setting & corresponding communication link is normal.
When the sending GOOSE link is interrupted, GOOSE VEBI setting is set as 0, and the state of
binary input [BI_BlkComm] at the sending end is not consistent with that at the receiving end, the
open position of circuit breaker will maintain its original value.
3.

GOOSE communication state

By the command menus GOOSE_COMM_STATE and GOOSE_RPT_STA in the menu

TEST_MODE of the protection device, the GOOSE communication state includes the content as
follows:
No.

Item

Description

N_RecvdFrame

Count the number of frames received through GOOSE

N_SentFrame

Count the number of frames sent through GOOSE.

N_Err_RecvdDMA

Count the number of DMA (Direct Memory Access) error

for receiving data through GOOSE.

N_Err_SentDMA

Count the number of DMA errors for transmitting data

through GOOSE.

N_Err_Recvd_Misc

Count the number of miscellaneous errors of receiving

data through GOOSE.

N_Err_Sent_Misc

Count the number of miscellaneous errors for transmitting

data through GOOSE.

N_Err_RecvdMemData

Counter the number of memory errors of receiving data

through GOOSE

N_NetStorm_GOOSE

Count the number of network storms occurred through

GOOSE.

3
4
5
6
7
8

The GOOSE report statistics includes the content as follows:

No.

4.

Item

Description

N_Fail_SentGOOSE

Count the number of being failed to transmit data through

GOOSE.

N_Err_DecodeGOOSE

Count the number of decoding errors through GOOSE.

GOOSE Alarm Information

No.

Item

Description

GAlm_NetStorm_NetA

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm

occurring on the network A.

GAlm_NetStorm_NetB

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm

occurring on the network B.

GAlm_Disc_NetA

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A is

disconnected.

GAlm_Disc_NetB

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B is

disconnected.

GAlm_CfgUnmatch

The GOOSE control blocks received on network and the

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

97

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

GOOSE control blocks in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched.

Optional types of GOOSE module are listed in the following.
NR1126A

NR1126B

NR1126C

NR1126D

SC Interface
100M FX

SC Interface
100M FX

ST Interface
100M FX

ST Interface
100M FX

SC Interface
100M FX

SC Interface
100M FX

ST Interface
100M FX

ST Interface
100M FX

RX1

ST Interface
IRIGB

Module ID

Interface

NR1126A

2 Ethernet

SC multi-mode optical fibre

2 Ethernet

SC multi-mode optical fibre

IRIGB

ST

2 Ethernet

ST multi-mode optical fibre

2 Ethernet

ST multi-mode optical fibre

IRIGB

ST

NR1126B
NR1126C
NR1126D

Physical Layer

RX1

ST Interface
IRIGB

Description

Support IEC61850, GOOSE and

IEC61850-9-1,
IEC61850-9-2,
receiving and sending data

6.3.6 BI Module
Intelligent binary input module (NR 1502) can supervise 25 binary inputs at the same time and
transmit binary inputs to other modules by inner bus. For NR 1502D, the rated work voltage of all
binary inputs are 24V, and for NR 1502A, the rated work voltage of all binary inputs are 220/110V.
When the voltage of binary input is greater than 70% of rated work voltage, the binary input is
energized and when the voltage of binary input is smaller than 60% of rated work voltage, the
binary input is de-energized.

98

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1502D

Pin No.

Sign

BI_2

02

BI_1

01

BI_4

04

BI_3

03

BI_6

06

BI_5

05

BI_8

08

BI_7

07

BI_10

10

BI_9

09

BI_12

12

BI_11

11

BI_14

14

13

16

BI_15

15

BI_18

18

BI_17

17

BI_20

20

BI_19

19

BI_22

22

BI_21

21

BI_24

24

BI_23

23

BI_26

26

BI_25

25

BI_28

28

BI_27

27

30

BI_29

29

Description

01

BI_Pulse_GPS

Binary input of time synchronizing

pulse

02

BI_Print

Binary input of initiating printing

BI_BlkComm

Binary
input
of
blocking
communication
between
the
protective device and SAS

03
04

BI_RstTarg

Binary input of signal reset

05

BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp

Binary input of switching active

setting group

06

BI_Opt2_ActiveGrp

Binary input of switching active

setting group

14

Opto_H+

Positive pole of power supply for

opto-coupler (220V/110V)

Optp_H-

Negative pole of power supply for

opto-coupler (220V/110V)

EBI_DiffP

Binary input of enabling/disabling

differential protection

EBI_DistP

Binary input of enabling/disabling

differential protection

EBI_ROC

Binary input of enabling/disabling

directional
zero-sequence
overcurrent protection

EBI_OC

Binary input of enabling/disabling

directional
phase
overcurrent
protection

EBI_Z1

Binary input of enabling/disabling

zone 1 of distance protection

15

07~11,
12,
17~29

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Remark

Regular binary input

Power supply

Configurable binary
input (if these binary
inputs
are
not
configured,
their
default state are 1)

99

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

BI_TrpA_Other

Binary input of other protection

operating to trip phase A

BI_TrpB_Other

Binary input of other protection

operating to trip phase B

BI_TrpC_Other

Binary input of other protection

operating to trip phase C

EBI_Opt1_AR

Binary input 1 of mode option of

automatic reclosure

EBI_Opt2_AR

Binary input 2 of mode option of

automatic reclosure

EBI_Lockout

Binary input used to lockout the

auto-reclosing function of the
protected line.

BI_3PTrp_Line

Binary input of line protection

operating to trip three phases

BI_3PTrp_G/T

Binary input of generator or

transformer protection operating to
trip three phases

BI_TrigOscillog

Binary input used to initiate record

waveform of present current and
voltage.

BI_MCB_VT_Line

Binary input of MCB of single-phase

voltage used for synchronism check

BI_MCB_VT_Bus

Binary input of MCB of three-phase

voltage used for protection

BI_52b_Pha

Binary input of normally closed

contact of phase A of circuit breaker

BI_52b_Phb

Binary input of normally closed

contact of phase B of circuit breaker

BI_52b_Phc

Binary input of normally closed

contact of phase C of circuit breaker

BI_LowPres_AR

Binary input of low pressure to

block automatic reclosure

BI_Send_TT

Binary input of sending transfer trip

BI_Send1_TS

Binary input of sending transfer

signal 1

BI_Send2_TS

Binary input of sending transfer

signal 2

13

Blank

16

Blank

30

Blank

1.

100

Configurable binary
input (if these binary
inputs
are
not
configured,
their
default state are 0)

Terminal 814

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

The positive pole of opto-coupler, which should be connected with the positive pole of DC power
supply (PWR module: terminal 001). It is used to supervise whether DC power supply is normal or
not. The positive pole of PWR module should be connected to common of all binary inputs.
2.

Terminal 815

The negative pole of opto-coupler, which should be connected with the negative pole of DC power
supply (PWR module: terminal 102).
3.

Terminal 801

Binary input: [BI_Pulse_GPS]

It is used to receive clock synchronism signal from GPS or other equipment used clock
synchronism, the binary input [BI_Pulse_GPS] will change from 0 to 1 once per second or per
minute depended on the setting [GPS_Pulse]. When setting [GPS_Pulse] is set to 1, the
equipment receives PPM (pulse per minute), otherwise, receives PPS (pulse per second). Clock
synchronism via RS-485 bus is recommended. Only one of them can be selected.
4.

Terminal 802

Binary input: [BI_Print]

It is used to manually to trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_Auto_Print]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_Auto_Print]=1), report will be
printed automatically as soon as it is formed.
5.

Terminal 803

Binary input: [BI_BlkComm]

It is used to block monitoring direction communication when the protective device is maintained. A
link located on the panel is used for that. When the equipment is in maintenance or commissioning
status, this link should be closed. All of the reports will not be sent via communication port then,
but local displaying and printing are still working. This link should be open during normal operation
condition.
6.

Terminal 804

Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]

It is used to manually reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing
a button on the panel or by remote command via communication channel.
7.

Terminal 805

Binary input: [BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp]

It is used to switch active setting group associating with binary input [Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp].
8.

Terminal 806

Binary input: [Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp]

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

101

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

It is used to switch active setting group associating with binary input [Bl_Opt1_ActiveGrp].
Table 6.3-2 Switchover of active setting group
Terminal

Binary input

Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

805

[Bl_Opt1_ActiveGrp]

806

[Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp]

All binary inputs mentioned below are configurable binary inputs, and they can be pointed to any
terminal except terminal 01~06, 13, 16 and 30 by software RCS-PC. The configuration method
can refer to section 7.3.2.
1.

Binary input: [EBI_DiffP]

It is used to enable/disable differential protection.

2.

Binary input: [EBI_DistP]

It is used to enable/disable distance protection.

3.

Binary input: [EBI_ROC]

It is used to enable/disable directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

4.

Binary input: [EBI_OC]

It is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent protection.

5.

Binary input: [EBI_Z1]

It is used to enable/disable zone 1 of distance protection.

6.

Binary input: [BI_TrpA_Other]

It is used to initiate BFP of phase A, and is usually from phase-A tripping contact of other
protection device. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out
immediately after operation.
7.

Binary input: [BI_TrpB_Other]

It is used to initiate BFP of phase B, and is usually from phase-B tripping contact of other
protection device. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out
immediately after operation.
8.

Binary input: [BI_TrpC_Other]

It is used to initiate BFP of phase C, and is usually from phase-C tripping contact of other
protection device. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out
immediately after operation.
9.

Binary input: [EBI_Opt1_AR]

It is used to select mode of auto-reclosing through switch associated with binary input
[EBI_Opt2_AR] when logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set as 0.

102

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

10. Binary input: [EBI_Opt2_AR]

It is used to select mode of auto-reclosing through switch associated with binary input
[EBI_Opt1_AR] when logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set as 0.
The below table shows the relation between the state of binary input and AR mode.
Pin No.

Binary input

1-Pole AR

3-Pole AR

1/3-Pole AR

Disable

808

EBI_Opt1_AR

809

EBI_Opt2_AR

When binary inputs [EBI_Opt1_AR] and [EBI_Opt2_AR] are both energized, only the
auto-reclosing function of the protective device is disabled but selection of faulty phase is still valid.
The auto-reclosing function is still finished by the other protective device. The auto-reclosing
function of the protected line can be locked out through energizing the binary input [EBI_Lockout].
When logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set to 1, the binary inputs [EBI_Opt1_AR] and
[EBI_Opt2_AR] are disabled.
11. Binary input: [EBI_Lockout]

It is used to lockout the auto-reclosing function of the protected line. Three-phase tripping is
implemented and the auto-reclosing function will be locked out for any type of fault when it is
energized.
12. Binary input: [BI_3PTrp_Line]

It is used to initiate BFP of three phases, and is usually from three-phase tripping contact of line
protection. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out immediately
after operation.
13. Binary input: [BI_3PTrp_G/T]

It is used to initiate BFP of three phases, and is usually from three-phase tripping contact of all
protection device except line protection, such as generator, transformer, and so on, which will not
initiate auto-reclosing.
14. Binary input: [BI_TrigOscillog]

It is used to initiate record waveform of present current and voltage.

15. Binary input: [BI_MCB_VT_Line]

It is used to indicate line VT is out of service. When VT is maintained or protective device is in

service without protection VT, it is energized. This binary input always connects single-phase VT.
16. Binary input: [BI_MCB_VT_Bus]

It is used to indicate busbar VT is out of service. When VT is maintained or protective device is in

service without protection VT, it is energized. This binary input always connects three-phase VT.
17. Binary input: [BI_52b_Pha]

It is normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of circuit breaker and is used to indicate the status
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

103

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

of circuit. It is provided by interposing relay, for example, CZX-12R.

18. Binary input: [BI_52b_Phb]

It is normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of circuit breaker and is used to indicate the
status of circuit. It is provided by interposing relay, for example, CZX-12R.
19. Binary input: [BI_52b_Phc]

It is normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of circuit breaker and is used to indicate the
status of circuit. It is provided by interposing relay, for example, CZX-12R.
20. Binary input: [BI_LowPres_AR]

It is connected with auxiliary contact of circuit breaker, which is used to supervise closing pressure
of circuit breaker. The auto-reclosing will be blocked after 200ms when it is energized. If
auto-reclosing of protective device is disabled, it need not be connected.
21. Binary input: [BI_Send_TT]

It is common connected with tripping contact from other protective device, such as breaker failure
protection. It is used to transfer tripping signal and trip remote circuit breaker through the channel.
22. Binary input: [BI_Send1_TS]

It is common connected with tripping contact from other protective device, such as breaker failure
protection. It is used to transfer signal and trip remote circuit breaker through the channel
associated with auxiliary criterion of other protective device, for example, RCS-925 voltage relay.
23. Binary input: [BI_Send2_TS]

It is common connected with tripping contact from other protective device, such as breaker failure
protection. It is used to transfer signal and trip remote circuit breaker through the channel
associated with auxiliary criterion of other protective device, for example, RCS-925 voltage relay.
Pin No.

104

Binary input

Pin No.

Binary input

801

BI_Pulse_GPS

816

802

BI_Print

817

BI_3PTrp_Line

803

BI_BlkComm

818

BI_3PTrp_G/T

804

BI_RstTarg

819

BI_TrigOscillog

805

Bl_Opt1_ActiveGrp

820

BI_MCB_VT_Line

806

Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp

821

BI_MCB_VT_Bus

807

BI_TrpA_Other

822

BI_52b_Pha

808

EBI_Opt1_AR

823

BI_52b_Phb

809

EBI_Opt2_AR

824

BI_52b_Phc

810

EBI_Lockout

825

BI_LowPres_AR

811

BI_TrpB_Other

826

BI_Send_TT

812

BI_TrpC_Other

827

BI_Send1_TS

813

828

BI_Send2_TS

814

829

BI_Reserved

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

815

830

The above table gives a default configuration of binary inputs.

DC Power Supply

814 Positive pole of DC (+)

815 Negative pole of DC (-)

801 BI_Pulse_GPS
802 BI_Print
803 BI_BlkComm
804 BI_RstTarg
805 BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp
806 BI_Opt2_ActiveGrp
807 Binary input x

829 Binary input x

Internal connected

Figure 6.3-4 External connections of BI module

6.3.7 BO Module
NR1521B
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Configurable BO1
Configurable BO2
Configurable BO3
Configurable BO4
Configurable BO5
Configurable BO6
Configurable BO7
Configurable BO8
Configurable BO9
Configurable BO10
Configurable BO11

The module provides 11 groups of normally open contacts, which are all configurable binary output.
Apart from configurable BO10 and BO11, all contacts provided by this module are controlled by
general pick-up relay.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

105

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Any operation signal, alarm signal, intermediate signal or combination signal (support
programmable logic) can be pointed to any output channel, which can fulfill that some special
requirement that specific signal must be output to trip circuit breaker or issue signal. The
configuration method can refer to section 7.3.3.

6.3.8 BO Module
NR1552A

Pin No.

Sign

BSJ-1

02

COM1

01

XTJ-1

04

BJJ-1

03

COM2

06

XHJ-1

05

BJJ-2

08

BSJ-2

07

COM4

10

COM3

09

TDGJ-1

12

TDGJ-2

11

YC1-1

14

YC2-1

13

YC1-2

16

YC2-2

15

YC1-2

18

YC2-2

17

TJ-1

20

COM

19

BCJ-1

22

TJABC-1

21

TJ-2

24

COM

23

BCJ-2

26

TJABC-2

25

TJ-3

28

COM

27

BCJ-3

30

TJABC-3

29

Description

01

COM1

Common terminal for local signal

01~02

BO_Fail_1

Binary output 1 of failure signal

01~03

BO_Alm_Abnor_1

Binary output 1 of alarm signal

01~04

BO_Trp_1

Binary output 1 of tripping signal

01~05

BO_Cls_1

Binary output 1 of closing signal

06

COM2

Common terminal for remote signal

06~07

BO_Fail_2

Binary output 2 of failure signal

06~08

BO_Alm_Abnor_2

Binary output 2 of alarm signal

09

COM3

Common terminal 1 for sending signal

09~11

BO_Alm_Ch_2

Binary output 2 of optical fibre channel abnormal

09~13

BO_Recv2_TS_1

Binary output 1 of transfer signal after receiving binary

signal of transfer signal 2

15~17

BO_Recv2_TS_2

Binary output 2 of transfer signal after receiving binary

signal of transfer signal 2

10

COM4

Common terminal 2 for sending signal

10~12

BO_Alm_Ch_1

Binary output 1 of optical fibre channel abnormal

10~14

BO_Recv1_TS_1

Binary output 1 of transfer signal after receiving binary

signal of transfer signal 1

16~18

BO_Recv1_TS_2

Binary output 2 of transfer signal after receiving binary

signal of transfer signal 1

106

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

19

COM

Common terminal 1 for tripping contact

19~20

BO_Trp1P_1

Binary output 1 of single-phase tripping

19~21

BO_Trp3P_1

Binary output 1 of three-phase tripping

19~22

BO_Lockout_1

Binary output 1 of blocking auto-reclosure

23

COM

Common terminal 2 for tripping contact

23~24

BO_Trp1P_2

Binary output 2 of single-phase tripping

23~25

BO_Trp3P_2

Binary output 2 of three-phase tripping

23~26

BO_Lockout_2

Binary output 2 of blocking auto-reclosure

27

COM

Common terminal 3 for tripping contact

27~28

BO_Trp1P_3

Binary output 3 of single-phase tripping

27~29

BO_Trp3P_3

Binary output 3 of three-phase tripping

27~30

BO_Lockout_3

Binary output 3 of blocking auto-reclosure

Local signal

Transfer signal 1

BO_Fail_1

Transfer signal 2
10

02

BO_Alm_Ch_1

03

BO_Recv1_TS_1

BO_Alm_Abnor_1

11
BO_Alm_Ch_2

12

BO_Trp

13
BO_Recv2_TS_1

14

09

04
BO_Cls

16
05

BO_Recv1_TS_2

15
BO_Recv2_TS_2

18

17

01
Load Shedding

Auto-reclosing 1

BO_Trp1p_3

Auto-reclosing 2

BO_Trp1P_1
28

BO_Trp3P_3

BO_Trp1P_2

BO_Trp3P_1
29

BO_BlkAR_3

24

20
BO_Trp3P_2
21
BO_BlkAR_1

25
BO_BlkAR_2

30

22

26

27

19

23

Remote signal
BO_Fail_2
07
BO_Alm_Abnor_2
08
06

Figure 6.3-5 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

For local signal, they are magnetic latching signals, so they can be reset by pressing RESET
button to energize binary input [BI_RstTarg] or reset command from SAS via communication
channel.
When DC power supply of protective device is lost or there is internal fault occurs in the protective
device, protective device will be blocked. Failure alarm signal will be issued by closing the
normally closed contact BO_Fail_1, BO_Fail_2 and BO_Fail_3.
When protective device is in abnormal condition but still running, such as VT circuit failure, CT
circuit failure, and so on, protective device is not blocked. Abnormal alarm signal will be issued by
closing the normally open contact BO_Alm_Abnor_1 and BO_Alm_Abnor_2.
When there is any protective element operating to trip three-phase circuit breaker or single-phase
circuit breaker, trip signal will be issued by closing the normally open contact BO_Trp_1,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

107

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

BO_Trp_2 and BO_Trp_3. BO_Trp_1 and BO_Trp_2 can be used to initiate auto-reclosing of other
protective device by connecting with binary input [BI_ExTrp1P_AR].
When there is any protective element operating to trip three-phase circuit breaker, trip signal will
be issued by closing the normally open contact BO_Trp3P_1, BO_Trp3P_2 and BO_Trp3P_3.
BO_Trp3P_1 and BO_Trp3P_2 can be used to initiate auto-reclosing of other protective device by
connecting with binary input [BI_ExTrp3P_AR].
When the conditions that is used to block auto-reclosing is met, the normally open contact
BO_BlkAR_1, BO_BlkAR_2 and BO_BlkAR_3 will be closed.
Transfer signal relay retransmits transfer signals and provides two normally open contacts
respectively. When the binary input [VBI_Recv1_TS] or [VBI_Recv2_TS] is energized, these
contacts BO_Recv1_TS_1 and BO_Recv1_TS_2 or BO_Recv2_TS_1 and BO_Recv2_TS_2 will
be closed.
Channel alarm relay outputs channel alarm signal and provides two normally open contacts:
[BO_Alm_Ch_1] and [BO_Alm_Ch_2]. When the protective device does not receive the signal
from remote end, data frame is abnormal during data transmission, the settings related with
channel of protective device on both ends are wrong, including [Equip_ID], [ID_Local],
[ID_Remote] and [En_InnClock_ChA], or error rate of channel is greater than 0.1%, these contacts
will be closed.

6.3.9 BO Module
NR1551A
COM1
COM2

02

COM

03

04
06

TJA-1

05

TJA-2

08

TJB-1

07

TJB-2

10

TJC-1

09

TJC-2

12

HJ-1

11

14

Pin No.

Sign

01

COM5

16

13
TJA

15

TJC

18

TJB

17

COM3

20

TJA-3

19

TJC-3

22

TJB-3

21

COM4

24

TJA-4

23

TJC-4

26

TJB-4

25

HJ

28

HJ

27

HJ-2

30

HJ-2

29

Description

02

COM1

Common terminal 1 of tripping

02~05

BO_TrpA_1

Binary output 1 of tripping of phase A

02~07

BO_TrpB_1

Binary output 1 of tripping of phase B

02~09

BO_TrpC_1

Binary output 1 of tripping of phase C

04

COM2

Common terminal 2 of tripping

108

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

04~08

BO_TrpA_2

Binary output 2 of tripping of phase A

04~10

BO_TrpB_2

Binary output 2 of tripping of phase B

04~12

BO_TrpC_2

Binary output 2 of tripping of phase C

20

COM3

Common terminal 3 of tripping

20~19

BO_TrpA_3

Binary output 3 of tripping of phase A

20~21

BO_TrpB_3

Binary output 3 of tripping of phase B

20~22

BO_TrpC_3

Binary output 3 of tripping of phase C

24

COM4

Common terminal 4 of tripping

24~23

BO_TrpA_4

Binary output 4 of tripping of phase A

24~25

BO_TrpB_4

Binary output 4 of tripping of phase B

24~26

BO_TrpC_4

Binary output 4 of tripping of phase C

16

COM5

Common terminal of remote signal

16~15

BO_TrpA_5

Binary output 5 of tripping of phase A

16~17

BO_TrpB_5

Binary output 5 of tripping of phase B

16~18

BO_TrpC_5

Binary output 5 of tripping of phase C

01~11

BO_Cls_1

Binary output 1 of closing circuit breaker

27~28

BO_Cls_3

Binary output 3 of closing circuit breaker

29~30

BO_Cls_2

Binary output 2of closing circuit breaker

Tripp 1

Trip 2

BO_TrpA_1

Remote signal

BO_TrpA_2
05

BO_TrpA_5
08

15
BO_TrpB_5
17

BO_TrpB_1

BO_TrpB_2
07

BO_TrpC_5
10

18
16

BO_TrpC_1

BO_TrpC_2

BO_Cls_3

09

12

02

04

27
28

Trip 3

Trip 4

BO_TrpA_3

Reclosing 1

BO_TrpA_4
19

BO_TrpB_3

BO_Cls_1
11

23
BO_TrpB_4

21
BO_TrpC_3

25
BO_TrpC_4

22

26

20

24

01
Reclosing 2
BO_Cls_2
29
30

Figure 6.3-6 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

The second BO module provides five groups of phase-segregated trip contacts and three groups
of auto-reclosing contacts, which are all instantaneous operating contact. The normally open
contact BO_TrpA_1, BO_TrpB_1, BO_TrpC_1 and BO_Cls_1, are connected with the first group
of tripping coil and closing coil of interposing relay to trip and close circuit breaker respectively, for
example, CZX-12R. Others are used as remote signal, to initiate fault recorder and to initiate
circuit breaker failure protection. If there are two circuit breakers needed tripped, for example, 3/2
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

109

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

breaker arrangement, the normally open contact BO_TrpA_2, BO_TrpB_2 and BO_TrpC_2 are
used to trip the second circuit breaker.

6.3.10 BO Module
NR1551B
COM1

02

01

COM2

04

03

06

Pin No.

Sign

TJA-5

05

TJA-6

08

TJB-5

07

TJB-6

10

TJC-5

09

TJC-6

12

11

14

13

COM3

16

TJA-7

15

TJC-7

18

TJB-7

17

COM4

20

TJA-8

19

TJC-8

22

TJB-8

21

24

23

26

25

28

27

30

29

Description

02

COM1

Common terminal 1 of tripping

02~05

BO_TrpA_5

Binary output 5 of tripping of phase A

02~07

BO_TrpB_5

Binary output 5 of tripping of phase B

02~09

BO_TrpC_5

Binary output 5 of tripping of phase C

04

COM2

Common terminal 2 of tripping

04~08

BO_TrpA_6

Binary output 6 of tripping of phase A

04~10

BO_TrpB_6

Binary output 6 of tripping of phase B

04~12

BO_TrpC_6

Binary output 6 of tripping of phase C

16

COM3

Common terminal 3 of tripping

16~15

BO_TrpA_7

Binary output 7 of tripping of phase A

16~17

BO_TrpB_7

Binary output 7 of tripping of phase B

16~18

BO_TrpC_7

Binary output 7 of tripping of phase C

20

COM4

Common terminal 4 of tripping

20~19

BO_TrpA_8

Binary output 8 of tripping of phase A

20~21

BO_TrpB_8

Binary output 8 of tripping of phase B

20~22

BO_TrpC_8

Binary output 8 of tripping of phase C

110

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Figure 6.3-7 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

When these contacts in the second module are not enough to used, another BO module can be
use as a expansion. Additional four groups of phase-segregated trip contacts can be gained.
Please declare firstly before ordering.

6.3.11 BO Module
NR1560A

Pin No.

BO1

02

BO1

01

BO2

04

BO2

03

06

05

08

07

BO3

10

BO3

09

BO4

12

BO4

11

BO5

14

BO5

13

BO6

16

BO6

15

BO7

18

BO7

17

BO8

20

BO8

19

BO9

22

BO9

21

BO10

24

BO10

23

26

25

28

27

30

29

Sign

Description

01~02

BO1

Reserved binary output

03~04

BO2

Reserved binary output

09~10

BO_Trp3P_Lockout_1

11~12

BO_Trp3P_Lockout_2

13~14

BO_Inprog_AR_1

Binary output 1 of automatic reclosure in progress

15~16

BO_Inprog_AR_2

Binary output 2 of automatic reclosure in progress

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Binary output 1 of three-phase tripping and blocking

automatic reclosure
Binary output 2 of three-phase tripping and blocking
automatic reclosure

111

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Binary output 1 of receiving the external signal of blocking

17~18

BO_BI_Lockout_1

19~20

BO_BI_Lockout_2

21~22

BO_Fail_AR_1

Binary output 1 of failure in auto-reclosing

23~24

BO_Fail_AR_2

Binary output 2 of failure in auto-reclosing

automatic reclosure
Binary output 2 of receiving the external signal of blocking
automatic reclosure

Reserved binary output

3-Pole tripping and Lockout

BO1

BO_Trp3P_Lockout_1
01

09

02
BO2

10
BO_Trp3P_Lockout_2
11

03
04
Auto-reclosing in progress

12
Blocking auto-reclosing

BO_Inprog_AR_1

BO_BI_Lockout_1
13

17
18

14
BO_Inprog_AR_2

BO_BI_Lockout_2
15

19

16

20

Fail in auto-reclosing
BO_Fail_AR_1

BO_Fail_AR_2
21

23

22

24

Figure 6.3-8 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

The fourth module can provide ten contacts used for 3-pole tripping and lockout, blocking
auto-reclosing and so on. Figure 6.3-8 shows output contacts and corresponding terminals
provided by this module.

6.3.12 PWR Module

The slot number of power supply module is 0. View from the back of device, the last module is
the power supply module.
Terminal 001~003 of power supply module are the dry contacts for failure and alarm output by the
device. Terminal 001 is the common terminal, the failure contact is a normally closed contact and
the alarm contact is a normally open contact.
Terminals 004-006 of power supply module are the other group of dry contacts for failure and
alarm.
Terminals 007 and 008 of power supply module are the output terminals of 24V power supply, the
24 V power supply is mainly used for the 24V opto-coupler input module. Among which, the
terminal 007 is for 24V+ and the terminal 008 is for 24V-. The rated current output by the power
supply is 200mA.
Terminals 010 and 011of power supply module are the power supply input terminals. In which, the
terminal 010 is for DC + and 011 is for DC -. The rated input voltages of power supply are adaptive
220V or 110V. For other voltage grades, special purchase order will be required. Before delivery,
112

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

please check the rated input voltage of the power supply module is the same as the voltage of
control power supply.
The power supply module provides terminal 012 and ground screw for the grounding of device.
Firstly, please connect the terminal 012 to the ground screw, and then use special ground wire to
connect it to the grounding copper busbar of cabinet. Good grounding is the most important
measure for keeping the device free from electromagnetic interference, hence, before the
application of the device, we must ensure that it has been well grounded.
NR1301A

COM1

01

BSJ1

02

BO_Fail_1
02
BO_Alm_Abnor_1
BJJ1

03

COM2

04

BSJ2

05

03
01
BO_Fail_2
05
BO_Alm_Abnor_2

BJJ2

06

06

24V+

07

04

24V-

08
09

DC+

10

DC-

11

GND

12
Grounding Screw

Grounding Bus

Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of PWR module

Pin No.

Sign

Description

01

Common_1

Common terminal 1

02

BO_Fail_1

Binary output 1 of failure signal

03

BO_Alm_Abnor_1

04

Common_2

Common terminal 2

05

BO_Fail_2

Binary output 2 of failure signal

06

BO_Alm_Abnor_2

07

Opto_L+

Positive pole of power supply for opto-coupler (24V)

08

Opto_L-

Negative pole of power supply for opto-coupler (24V)

09

Blank

10
11
12

Binary output 1 of alarm signal

Binary output 2 of alarm signal

Pwr+

Positive pole of power supply for the protective device

(220V/110V)

Pwr-

Negative pole of power supply for the protective device

(220V/110V)

GND

Ground

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

113

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.4 Display Panel

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, indicator lamp and ARM
processor. The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display
module, keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through serial port etc. The
liquid crystal display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting,
which has a user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

114

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.1 General Description
By adoption of PCS-PC software, it is able to make binary input and binary output configuration,
LED indicator configuration and programming logic for PCS-931.

7.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software

PCS-PC software, assorted with UAPC platform device, is developed in order to meet customers
demand on functions of device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects
substation as the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one
substation joint to govern many ones of the devices. The software provides on-line and off-line
functions: on-line mode: Ethernet connected with the device to support IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
and downloading of binary files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration.
In addition, it also supports programmable logic to meet customers corresponding demand. For
any detail, please refer to Instruction Manual of PCS-PC Auxiliary Software.

7.3 Protective Device Configuration

7.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators
1. This protection device provides 20 LED indicators, besides 10 defined LED indicators, such as,
HEALTHY LED, ALARM LED and TRIP A LED and so on, another 10 LEDs can be
configured by users as required.
2. The right tree structure of the column

in the software provides

elements for lighting up, including protection elements, alarm elements and binary input
elements.
3. Use the column

to choose whether hold LED or not. In case of Yes selected,

resetting must be performed by the resetting button once it is lit. In case of No selected, the
signals will reset automatically once the input signal returns.
4. If users hope the User_defined_LED_1 is lit and held when DPFC differential element
operates, configure it as per the following picture.
5. The label of the User_defined_LED_1 can be edited by double-click it.
6. The signal in the column of Signal can be moved up, moved down, inserted or deleted by
right-click, and then left-click to execute corresponding command (up, down, insert, delete).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

115

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input

1. Pin number of user-defined binary input on module is provided by the column

on the left of the interface.

2. The next step is to set time delay

and broadening time

(unit: ms) of the corresponding binary inputs, which can be set separately.
3. The column

at the right is the corresponding binary

inputs provided, which needs the user to configure. User can draw it from the right list.
4. The signal in the column of Destination can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to
execute delete command.

116

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output

1. The function is applied for configuration of binary output terminals of BO module (NR1521B) of
the protective device. There are total 11 binary output contacts.
2. Users can draw the elements from the column

at the right to

point to a or several binary output contact. The optional signals include: Trip Elements, Alarm,
Binary Change and Other Type (Reserved).
3. In the event that user want to use the contact

as alarm

output contacts of channel A abnormality, find the corresponding alarm element in the right
tree structure and draw it to the corresponding position as below.
4. The signal added in the column of Source can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to
execute delete command.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

117

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

118

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

Chapter 8 Settings
The equipment has 10 setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for
all protection setting groups.
Note!

All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
CT ratio. Zero sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0
and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.

8.1 Equipment Parameters

Overview

Table 8.1-1 Equipment parameters

No.

Item

Range

IP_Addr_NetA

Subnet_Mask_A

En_NetA

IP_Addr_NetB

Subnet_Mask_B

En_NetB

IP_Addr_NetC

Subnet_Mask_C

En_NetC

10

IP_Addr_NetD

11

Subnet_Mask_D

12

En_NetD

13

Comm_Addr

0~255

14

COM1_Baud

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200

15

COM2_Baud

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200

16

COM1_Protocol

0, 1 or 2

17

COM2_Protocol

0, 1 or 2

18

En_BlkComm

0 or 1

19

Printer_Baud

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400

20

En_Auto_Print

0 or 1

21

En_HiSpeed_Print

0 or 1

22

Opt_TimeSync

0, 1 or 2

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

119

Chapter 8 Settings

No.

23

Item

En_DualNet_GOOSE

Range

0 or 1

Setting Description

1.

IP_Addr_NetA, IP_Addr_NetB, IP_Addr_NetC, IP_Addr_NetD

IP address of Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D

2.

Subnet_Mask_A, Subnet_Mask_B, Subnet_Mask_C, Subnet_Mask_D

Subnet mask of Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D

3.

En_NetA, En_NetA, En_NetA, En_NetA

Put Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D in service

They are used for Ethernet communication based on the 103 protocol. When the IEC 61850
protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.
4.

Comm_Addr

Communication address between the protective device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485
5.

COM1_Baud

Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port 1

6.

COM2_Baud

Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port 2

7.

COM1_Protocol

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 1

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
2: Modbus Protocol
8.

COM2_Protocol

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 2

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
2: Modbus Protocol
9.

En_BlkComm

It is set as 1 when the device is in maintenance. During such period, the fault report due to test
will not be sent upstream through communication ports, while local display and printing will not be
affected.
It is set as 0 when the device is in service. The relation between this setting and binary input
[BI_BlkComm] is OR, i.e. as long as one of them is set as 1, such information as fault report
and waveform will not be sent upstream.
120

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

10. Printer_Baud

Baud rate of printer port

11. En_Auto_Print

If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as 1. Otherwise, it
should be set to 0.
12. En_HiSpeed_Print

It is set as 0 for common printing with high definition, while it is set as 1 for high-speed printing.
13. Opt_TimeSync

It is set as "0", 1 or 2 for different external clock source.

0: PPS (pulse per second) differential
1: IRIG-B differential
2: PPM (pulse per minute) via external contact
14. En_DualNet_GOOSE

1: Enable both net A link and net B link of the GOOSE module, and then the GOOSE module is
able to work in dual Ethernet mode.
0: Disable net B link of the GOOSE module, and then the GOOSE module can only work in single
Ethernet mode.

8.2 System Parameters

Overview

Table 8.2-1 System parameters

No.

1.

Item

Range

1~10

Set Value

ActiveGrp

Equip_ID

I1N

0~9999 A

1200A

I2N

1A or 5 A

1A

U1N

0~1200 kV

220V

En_BI_GOOSE

0 or 1

Line2

ActiveGrp

It is current active setting group. 10 setting groups are provided for selecting, group number from 0
to 9. Equipment parameter is shared for 10 setting groups.
2.

Equip_ID

It is intended to set Chinese character field codes (12 bits) or ASCII codes (last 6 bits), which can
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

121

Chapter 8 Settings

be recognized by the device automatically. Such setting is used for printing messages.
3.

I1N

Primary rated current of CT;

4.

I2N

Secondary rated current of CT;

5.

U1N

Primary rated voltage of VT;

6.

En_BI_GOOSE

This setting is usually used for the case that GOOSE scheme is adopted in the bay level of digital
substation. When it is set as 1, the binary signal is valid received from GOOSE net and is invalid
received via opto-coupler, but corresponding binary input change report is still generated if the
status of binary input is changed. When it is set as 0, the binary signal is invalid received from
GOOSE net and is valid received via opto-coupler, but corresponding binary input change report is
still generated if the status of binary input is changed.

8.3 Protection Settings

All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT.

Overview

Table 8.3-1 Protection settings

No.

Item

Remark

Range

Unit

I_DPFC_OC_FD

current setting of DPFC current fault

(0.02~10)In
detector element

I_ROC_FD

current setting of zero sequence current

(0.02~10)In
fault detector element

Z_DPFC

impedance setting of DPFC distance

(0.00~220.00)/In
element

K_Corr_CT

current ratio factor of CT

I_Diff

the minimum pickup current setting of

(0.02~30.00)In
current differential protection

I_Diff_CTS

current setting of differential protection

(0.02~30.00)In
for CT circuit failure

ID_Local

ID of local protection device

0~65535

ID_Remote

ID of remote protection device

0~65535

K0

zero-sequence
coefficient

0.00~2.00

10

I_OC_PSBR

current setting for power swing blocking (0.02~40.00)In

122

ohm

0.20~10.00

compensation

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

11

Z_PG1

impedance setting of zone 1

phase-to-ground distance element

of

12

Z_PG2

impedance setting of zone 2

phase-to-ground distance element

of

13

t_PG2

time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground

0.00~10.00
distance element

14

Z_PG3

impedance setting of zone 3

phase-to-ground distance element

15

t_PG3

time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-ground

0.00~10.00
distance element

16

Z_PP1

impedance setting of zone 1

phase-to-phase distance element

of

17

Z_PP2

impedance setting of zone 2

phase-to-phase distance element

of

18

t_PP2

time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-phase

0.00~10.00
distance element

19

Z_PP3

impedance setting of zone 3

phase-to-phase distance element

20

t_PP3

time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-phase

0.00~10.00
distance element

21

Z_Rev

Impedance setting of reversal distance

(0.00~220.00)/In
element

22

t_Rev

time delay of reversal distance element 0.00~10.00

23

R_Blinder

restrict impedance of the reach of

(0.00~220.00)/In
distance element

ohm

R1_Quad

resistance setting of zone 1 of

quadrilateral characteristic distance (0.00~220.00)/In
element

ohm

R2_Quad

resistance setting of zone 2 of

quadrilateral characteristic distance (0.00~220.00)/In
element

ohm

26

R3_Quad

resistance setting of zone 3 of

quadrilateral characteristic distance (0.00~220.00)/In
element

ohm

27

phi1_Reach

phase angle of line positive sequence

30.00~89.00
impedance

Deg

28

phi0_Reach

phase angle of line zero sequence

30.00~89.00
impedance

Deg

29

phi_Shift_ZPG

phase shift of zone 1, 2

phase-to-ground distance element

of

0~30

Deg

30

phi_Shift_ZPP

phase shift of zone 1, 2

phase-to-phase distance element

of

0~30

Deg

31

I_ROC1

current setting of stage 1 of directional (0.02~40.00)In

24

25

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

of

of

(0.00~220.00)/In

ohm

(0.00~220.00)/In

ohm

(0.00~220.00)/In

s
ohm
s

(0.00~220.00)/In

ohm

(0.00~220.00)/In

ohm

(0.00~220.00)/In

s
ohm
s
ohm
s

A
123

Chapter 8 Settings

zero-sequence overcurrent element

32

I_ROC2

current setting of stage 2 of directional

(0.02~40.00)In
zero sequence overcurrent element

33

t_ROC2

time delay of stage 2 of directional

0.00~10.00
zero-sequence overcurrent element

34

I_ROC3

current setting of stage 3 of directional

(0.02~40.00)In
zero-sequence overcurrent element

35

t_ROC3

time delay of stage 3 of directional

0.00~10.00
zero-sequence overcurrent element

36

I_ROC4

current setting of stage 4 of directional

(0.02~40.00)In
zero-sequence overcurrent element

37

t_ROC4

time delay of stage 4 of directional

0.00~10.00
zero-sequence overcurrent element

38

I_InvROC

current
setting
of
inverse-time
(0.02~40.00)In
zero-sequence overcurrent protection

39

t_InvROC

time
delay
of
inverse-time
0.00~10.00
zero-sequence overcurrent protection

40

I_ROC_SOTF

current setting of accelerated stage of

(0.02~40.00)In
zero sequence overcurrent element

41

I_OC_VTS

phase current setting of overcurrent

(0.02~40.00)In
element for VTS

42

I_ROC_VTS

zero-sequence current setting

overcurrent element for VTS

43

t_OC/ROC_VTS

time setting of phase or zero-sequence

0.00~10.00
overcurrent element for VTS

44

I_OC1

current setting of stage 1 of directional

(0.02~40.00)In
phase overcurrent protection

45

t_OC1

time delay of stage 1 of directional

0.00~10.00
phase overcurrent protection

46

I_OC2

current setting of stage 2 of directional

(0.02~40.00)In
phase overcurrent protection

47

t_OC2

time delay of stage 2 of directional

0.00~10.00
phase overcurrent protection

48

I_OC3

current setting of stage 3 of directional

(0.02~40.00)In
phase overcurrent protection

49

t_OC3

time delay of stage 3 of directional

0.00~10.00
phase overcurrent protection

50

Opt_InvOC3

the option of inverse-time characteristic

for the stage 3 of phase overcurrent 1~3
protection.

51

I_OC_BFP1

phase current setting of stage 1 of (0.02~40.00)In

breaker failure protection

124

of

(0.02~40.00)In

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

52

I_ROC_BFP1

zero-sequence current setting of stage (0.02~40.00)In

1 of breaker failure protection

53

I_NegOC_BFP1

negative-sequence current setting of (0.02~40.00)In

stage 1 of breaker failure protection

54

I_OC_BFP2

phase current setting of stage 2 of (0.02~40.00)In

breaker failure protection

55

I_ROC_BFP2

zero-sequence current setting stage 2 (0.02~40.00)In

of breaker failure protection

56

I_NegOC_BFP2

negative-sequence current setting of (0.02~40.00)In

stage 2 of breaker failure protection

A
s

t_BFP1

time delay setting of retripping local 0.00~10.00

breaker by stage 1 of breaker failure
protection

58

t_BFP2

time delay setting of tripping adjacent 0.00~10.00

breaker by stage 2 of breaker failure
protection

59

phi_Diff_SynChk

phase difference limit of synchronism

0~89
check

Deg

60

phi_Fix_Diff

fixed phase difference between bus

0~359
voltage and line voltage

Deg

61

f_Diff_SynChk

frequency
difference
synchronism check

57

62

V_Diff_SynChk

limit

of

0.02~1.00

Hz

voltage difference limit of synchronism

(0.02~0.80)Un
check

63

V_Dead

voltage threshold of no-voltage check

(0.05~0.80)Un
condition

64

V_Live

voltage threshold of voltage check

(0.50~1.00)Un
condition

65

t_VoltChk

time delay of voltage and no-voltage

0.01~50.00
check condition

66

t_SynChk

time delay
condition

0.01~50.00

67

t_1P_AR

time delay of single-pole auto-reclosing 0.00~50.00

68

t_3P_AR

time delay of three-pole auto-reclosing

69

t_CBClsd_AR

time delay of circuit breaker in closed

0.00~250.00
state before reclosing

70

t_Unsuc_AR

waiting
time
before
announcing
0.00~250.00
unsuccessful auto-reclosing

71

t_Wait_SynChk

maximum wait time for synchronizing

0.00~250.00
window

72

t_PW_AR

circuit breaker closing pulse length

73

t_Reclaim_AR

minimum

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

of

time

synchronism

required

check

0.00~50.00

0.00~50.00

between 0.00~250.00

125

Chapter 8 Settings

successive reclosing sequences

74

X1L

positive sequence reactance of the line (0.00~550)/In

ohm

75

R1L

positive sequence resistance of the line (0.00~550)/In

ohm

76

X0L

zero sequence reactance of the line

(0.00~550)/In

ohm

77

R0L

zero sequence resistance of the line

(0.00~550)/In

ohm

78

XC1L

positive-sequence
impedance of the line

(40~65535)/In

ohm

79

XC0L

zero-sequence capacitive impedance of

(40~65535)/In
the line

ohm

80

Z_Reac_Local

impedance setting of reactor of local

(40~65535)/In
line

ohm

81

Z_GndReac_Local

impedance setting of ground reactor of

(40~65535)/In
local line

ohm

82

Z_Reac_Remote

impedance setting of reactor of remote

(40~65535)/In
line

ohm

83

Z_GndReac_Remote

impedance setting of ground reactor of

(40~65535)/In
remote line

ohm

84

LineLength

total length of the line

0.00~655.35

85

Line_ID

number of the line

0-65535

Setting Description

1.

I_DPFC_OC_FD

capacitive

kM

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This value should be greater than maximum variation of load current and
typically 0.2 In. For line with wide variation of load current like those for electric railway, heavy
rolling mill or aluminum-smelting, the setting should be increased properly so that frequent starting
of the equipment could be avoided.
2.

I_ROC_FD

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: It shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current. Setting it
based on same primary current on both ends.
3.

Z_DPFC

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: it shall be 80~85% impedance of whole line. For double-circuit lines, 70% of the
line impedance is recommended. However, for short line, it is recommended that DPFC distance
protection should be disabled if the set value is smaller than 1/In.
4.

I_Diff

Setting step: 0.01A

126

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

Setting principle: it shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current under the maximum load
conditions, and 400A~700A (primary current) is recommended. When the logic setting
[En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, it can be appropriately increased, and 500A~800A (primary
current) is recommended.
5.

ID_Local

6.

ID_Remote

Used to confirm that equipments at both ends of line are compatible. The end of which setting
[ID_Local] should be same as the [ID_Remote] of the other and the greater [ID_Local] between
the two ends is chosen as a master end for sampling synchronism, the other is a slave end. If the
setting [ID_Local] is set as same as [ID_Remote], that means the equipment in loopback testing
state.
7.

K_Corr_CT

The ratio of CTs on two terminals of the line could be different. it could be corrected by setting
[K_Corr_CT].
Setting principle: Suppose CT ratio, Terminal M: kM=IM1n : IM2n; Terminal N: is and kN=IN1n : IN2n
IM1n: primary rated current of terminal M, IM2n: secondary rated current of terminal M
IN1n: primary rated current of terminal N, IN2n: secondary rated current of terminal N
If IM1n>= IN1n, then set [K_Corr_CT]
Terminal M: [K_Corr_CT]=1.00
Terminal N: [K_Corr_CT]=IN1n / IM1n
For example:
Terminal M: CT ratio=2500:1, its setting [K_Corr_CT] is set as 1.0
Terminal N: CT ratio=1250:5, its setting [K_Corr_CT] is set as 0.5
8.

I_Diff_CTS

Setting step: 0.01A

When CT circuit fails, this setting is the threshold value of differential protection instead of the
setting [I _Diff] if the logic setting [En_CTSBlkDiff] is set as 0.
9.

K0

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: K0=(Z0LZ1L)/3Z1L, where Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance
of the line respectively. Actual measurement value is suggested adopted, but calculated value with
0.05 subtracted from can also be used if there is not actual measurement value.
10. I_OC_PSBR

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

127

Chapter 8 Settings

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This current setting should be greater than maximum load current of the line. The
sensitivity coefficient takes 1.1.
11. Z_PG1

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: Setting of this zone should be 0.8~0.85 times the impedance of the line and
should be decreased properly for line with mutual inductance. The recommended value is 0.7
times the impedance of the line. The setting should avoid zone 1 of distance element maloperation
when a fault occurs in the remote bus of line.
12. Z_PP1

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: Setting of this zone should be 0.8~0.85 times the impedance of the line. The
setting should avoid zone 1 of distance element maloperation when a fault occurs in the remote
bus of line.
13. Z_PG2
14. Z_PG3
15. Z_PP2
16. Z_PP3
17. t_PG2
18. t_PG3
19. t_PP2
20. t_PP3

Setting principle: Setting of the impedance and time delay of these zones should meet
requirements between various zones and operation should be ensured even for fault at end of the
line.
21. Z_Rev

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: it should be 50% impedance of the whole line.
22. t_Rev

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: it should meet requirement between zone 3 distance element and busbar
protection.
23. R_Blinder
128

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load
conditions and it should meet the requirement of sensitivity, usually take 0.7 as sensitive
coefficient.
24. R1_Quad
25. R2_Quad
26. R3_Quad

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: The proposed limitation of Z/R ratio is 1/4, in another word, it is recommended
that Z/R ratio is not smaller than 1/4.
Besides [R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] and [R3_Quad] should be in the range of (0.05~200)/In and ward
load impedance, these settings are recommended to satisfy the following condition:
[R1_Quad][4Z_PG1], [R2_Quad][4Z_PG2], [R3_Quad][4Z_PG3]. But this limitation is not
imperative. So during the calculation of the settings [R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] and [R3_Quad], the
consideration includes: the setting range of (0.05~200)/In, the load impedance and the proposed
limitation of Z/R ratio.
27. phi1_Reach
28. phi0_Reach

Setting step: 1
Phase angle of positive and zero sequence impedance of the line. Set as they should be.
29. phi_Shift_ZPG

Setting step: 1
Phase shift of zone 1 and 2 phase-to-ground distance element. Recommended value: 30for
length of the line < 10 km, 15for length 10 km and 0for length 40 km.
30. phi_Shift_ZPP

Setting step: 1
Phase shift of zone 1 and 2 phase-to-phase distance element. Recommended value: 30for
length of the line < 2 km, 15for length 2 km and 0for length 10 km.
31. I_ROC1
32. I_ROC2
33. t_ROC2
34. I_ROC3
35. t_ROC3

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

129

Chapter 8 Settings

36. I_ROC4
37. t_ROC4

Current settings and time delay of stage 1~4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.
38. I_InvROC

It is set according to the fault condition via maximum fault resistance (i.e. maximum fault
resistance takes 100 for 220kV transmission line and 300 for 500kV transmission line), and it
shall be greater than the maximum unbalanced current during the normal operation condition,
usually not greater than 300A.
39. t_InvROC

It is the time constant of normal IDMT equation and the following criterion shall be met:
t 0ZDinv TS + t

t 0ZDinv t 0ZD2XL + t
Where:
t 0ZDinv : The time delay of the inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
t 0ZD2XL : The time delay of zone 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection in the
adjacent line

t : The extra time delay

TS : The time delay for 1-pole reclosing
40. I_ROC_SOTF

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This setting should ensure sufficient sensitivity to ground fault at end of the line.
41. I_OC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01A

Current setting of phase overcurrent element for VTS.
42. I_ROC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01A

Current setting of zero sequence overcurrent element for VTS.
43. t_OC/ROC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01s

130

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

Time setting of phase and zero sequence overcurrent elements for VTS.
44. I_OC1
45. t_OC1
46. I_OC2
47. t_OC2
48. I_OC3
49. t_OC3

Current settings and time delay of stage 1~4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.
50. Opt_InvOC3

The option of inverse-time characteristic for stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection

1: standard inverse
2: very inverse
3: extremely inverse
51. I_OC_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01A

Phase current setting of stage 1 of breaker failure protection
52. I_ROC_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01A

Zero-sequence current setting of stage 1 of breaker failure protection
53. I_NegOC_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01A

Negative-sequence current setting of stage 1 of breaker failure protection
54. I_OC_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01A

Phase current setting of stage 2 of breaker failure protection
55. I_ROC_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01A

Zero-sequence current setting of stage 2 of breaker failure protection
56. I_NegOC_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01A

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

131

Chapter 8 Settings

Negative-sequence current setting of stage 2 of breaker failure protection

57. t_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01s

The breaker protected directly by the breaker failure protection will be re-tripped with this delay
when the breaker failure protection operates.
58. t_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01s

Time delay of tripping all adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same busbar and remote end
circuit breaker by stage 2 of breaker failure protection.
59. phi_Diff_SynChk

Setting step: 1
Phase difference limit for synchronism check
60. phi_Fix_Diff

Setting step: 1
The line voltage can be phase or phase-to-phase voltage, and this setting is referred to the angle
that line voltage is lagged behind the busbar voltage during synchronism check.
For example, in case busbar voltage adopts phase A voltage, the fixed phase difference between
UB and UL is as follows:
UL

AB

BC

CA

phi_Fix_Diff

120

240

330

90

30

61. f_Diff_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01Hz

Frequency difference limit for synchronism check
62. V_Diff_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01V

Voltage difference limit for synchronism check
63. V_Dead

Setting step: 0.01V

Setting principle: the setting must be greater than the coupling voltage produced due to coupling of
adjacent lines, and is generally set as 30%Un.
64. V_Live

Setting step: 0.01V

132

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

Setting principle: the setting should be set according to actual conditions, and is generally set as
80%Un.
65. t_VoltChk

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting is generally set as 0.05s.
66. t_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting shall be set according to actual requirements. In case frequency
difference value is not adopted, the setting shall be set in conjunction with the requirements of
frequency difference.
67. t_1P_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting should be set according to system stability requirement, meanwhile,
arc-extinguishing of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered.
Generally, this setting is greater than 0.5s, 1.0s is recommended.
68. t_3P_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting should be set according to system stability requirement,
arc-extinguishing of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered.
In addition, possibility for two-side protection (double power supply) to cut off fault with different
time limit should be taken into consideration. This setting for power plant outlets or intensive
network is generally set as 10s.
69. t_CBClsd_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Time delay of circuit breaker in closed state before reclosing
70. t_Unsuc_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

The setting is the time delay from reclosing command sent to unsuccessful reclosing, which shall
be greater than the reclosing operation time of circuit breaker.
71. t_Wait_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01s

The setting is the maximum allowable time used for synchronism check. In case the synchronism
check is unsuccessful after exceeding this setting, the auto-reclosing will be blocked.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

133

Chapter 8 Settings

72. t_PW_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Duration time of circuit breaker closing pulse length. The setting must be greater than the
reclosing time of circuit breaker.
73. t_Reclaim_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

The reset time of circuit breaker after auto-reclosing operation. After resetting, the auto-reclosing
can implement the next reclosing.
74. X1L
75. R1L
76. X0L
77. R0L

Setting step: 0.01

Positive sequence and zero sequence reactance and resistance of the line. Parameter of the
transmission line, used for calculation of fault location.
78. XC1L
79. XC0L

Setting step: 1
Setting principle: when the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 1, they must be set
according to actual parameters of total transmission line (secondary value). If no actual measured
value is provided, the following table can be as a reference.
Capacitive impedance and current of overhead per 100KM based on different voltage class
Voltage Class

XC1

XC0

Capacitance current

220kV

3700

5260

34A

330kV

2860

4170

66A

500kV

2590

3790

111A

750kV

2242

3322

193A

However, when the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 1, they can be set as any value
within its setting range, or [XC0L]=1.5Un/[I_Pkp_Diff]; [XC1L]=Un/[I_Pkp_Diff].
It is worth of attention that [XC1L] must be smaller than [XC0L].
80. Z_Reac_Local

Setting step: 1
Setting principle: if shunt reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the
134

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

secondary value of shunt reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000. When
the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within its
setting range.
81. Z_GndReac_Local

Setting step: 1
Setting principle: if ground reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the
secondary value of ground reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000. When
the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within its
setting range.
82. Z_Reac_Remote

Setting step: 1
Setting principle: if shunt reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the
secondary value of shunt reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000. When
the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within its
setting range.
83. Z_GndReac_Remote

Setting step: 1
Setting principle: if ground reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the
secondary value of ground reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000.
When the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within
its setting range.
84. LineLength

Total length of the line. The actual total length of the line km, used for calculation of fault location.
85. Line_ID

Number of the line. The actual identification number of the transmission line in site, only used for
printing report.
Note!

For impedance setting, even if some zones of distance element are disabled, these
settings must meet the following relation:
[Z_PP3][Z_PP2][Z_PP1]
[Z_PG3][Z_PG2][Z_PG1]
Impedance setting of zone 3 of distance element should be sensitive to fault at end of the
line.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

135

Chapter 8 Settings

Note!

All zero-sequence current settings should be greater than that of zero-sequence current
fault detector element. These settings must meet the following relation:
[I_ROC1][I_ROC2][I_ROC3][I_ROC4][I_ROC_FD]
[I_OC1][I_OC2][I_OC3]

8.4 Logic Settings

These logic settings are used to configure protective function of the protective device. They can be
set as 1 or 0. Setting as 1 means that the corresponding protective function is enabled or valid,
while setting as 0 means that the corresponding protective function is disabled or invalid.
Overview

Table 8.4-1 Logic settings

No.

Item

En_Z_DPFC

En_DiffP_ChA

En_DPFC_Diff1

En_DPFC_Diff2

En_Stdy_Diff1

En_Stdy_Diff2

En_REF

En_PhSeg_RecvTT

En_3P_RecvTT

10

En_CompCurr

136

Remark

enable DPFC distance protection

1: enable
0: disable
enable differential protection of channel A
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 1 of DPFC current differential element
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 2 of DPFC current differential element
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 1 of steady-state current differential element
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 2 of steady-state current differential element1:
enable
0: disable
enable zero-sequence current differential element
1: enable
0: disable
enable phase-segregated inter-tripping element
1: enable
0: disable
enable accelerated inter-tripping element
1: enable
0: disable
enable capacitive current compensation
1: enable
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

11

En_CTSBlkDiff

12

En_InnClock_ChA

13

En_FD_Ctrl_TT

14

En_LineVT

0: disable
enable differential protection blocked during CT circuit
failure
1: enable
0: disable
enable inner clock of channel A
1: enable
0: disable
transfer trip controlled by local fault detector
1: enable
0: disable
primary voltage of VT deriving from line voltage
1: from line VT
0: from busbar VT

En_PSBR

enable PSBR for zone 1,2 of distance element

1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPG1

enable zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance element

1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPG2

enable zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance element

1: enable
0: disable

18

En_ZPG3

enable zone 3 of phase-to-ground distance element

1: enable
0: disable

19

En_ZPP1

enable zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance element

1: enable
0: disable

20

En_ZPP2

enable zone 2 of phase-to-phase distance element

1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPP3

enable zone 3 of phase-to-phase distance element

1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPG_Rev

enable phase-to-ground reversal distance element

1: enable
0: disable

23

En_ZPP_Rev

enable phase-to-phase reversal distance element

1: enable
0: disable

24

En_Blinder

enable restrict impedance measured of line load

1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPG1_Quad

enable zone 1 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance

protection
1: enable
0: disable

15

16

17

21

22

25

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

137

Chapter 8 Settings

En_ZPG2_Quad

enable zone 2 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance

protection
1: enable
0: disable

27

En_ZPG3_Quad

enable zone 3 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance

protection
1: enable
0: disable

28

En_BI_Z1_Vld

enable the function of binary input for enabling/disabling

zone 1 of distance protection

29

En_Z2SOTF_AR3P

enable zone 2 of distance element for SOTF when 3-pole AR

1: enable
0: disable

30

En_Z3SOTF_AR3P

enable zone 3 of distance element for SOTF when 3-pole AR

1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC1

enable stage 1 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection
1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC2

enable stage 2 of directional zero -sequence overcurrent

protection
1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC3

enable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection
1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC4

enable stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection
1: enable
0: disable
3

of

directional

En_Dir_ROC3

enable direction blocking to stage

zero-sequence overcurrent protection
1: enable
0: disable

of

directional

En_Dir_ROC4

enable direction blocking to stage

zero-sequence overcurrent protection
1: enable
0: disable

37

En_InvROC

enable inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

1: enable
0: disable

38

En_Dir_InvROC

enable inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

controlled by direction element
1: enable

26

31

32

33

34

35

36

138

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

0: disable

En_ROC3_SOTF

enable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection accelerated operating
1: enable
0: disable

40

En_ROC4_SOTF

enable stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent

protection accelerated operating
1: enable
0: disable

41

En_OC1

enable stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection

1: enable
0: disable

42

En_OC2

enable stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection

1: enable
0: disable

En_OC3

enable stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection

1: enable
0: disable

En_Dir_OC1

enable direction blocking to stage 1 of directional phase

overcurrent protection
1: enable
0: disable

En_Dir_OC2

enable direction blocking to stage 2 of directional phase

overcurrent protection
1: enable
0: disable

En_Dir_OC3

enable direction blocking to stage 3 of directional phase

overcurrent protection
1: enable
0: disable

En_InvOC3

enable inverse-time characteristic for stage 3 of phase

overcurrent protection
1:inverse time
0: definite time

En_BFP

enable breaker failure protection

1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC_1P_BFP

enable zero-sequence current criterion of breaker failure

protection initiated by single-phase tripping contact
1: enable
0: disable

50

En_ROC_BFP

enable zero-sequence current criterion of breaker failure

protection initiated by three-phase tripping contact
1: enable
0: disable

51

En_NegOC_BFP

enable negative-sequence current criterion of breaker failure

39

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

139

Chapter 8 Settings

protection initiated by three-phase tripping contact

1: enable
0: disable

52

En_BFP_12

enable current criterion for stage 1 and stage 2 of breaker

failure protection
1: enable
0: disable

53

En_3PTrip

enable three-phase tripping mode

1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPP2_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when phase-to-phase zone 2

of distance protection operating
1: enable
0: disable

En_ZPG2_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when phase-to-ground zone 2

of distance protection operating
1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC2_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 2 of directional

zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating
1: enable
0: disable

En_ROC3_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 3 of directional

zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating
1: enable
0: disable

En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 1 of directional

phase overcurrent protection operating to trip three-phase
circuit breaker
1: enable
0: disable

En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 2 of directional

phase overcurrent protection operating to trip three-phase
circuit breaker
1: enable
0: disable

En_PhSF_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when selection of faulty

phase fails
1: enable
0: disable

61

En_PDF_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked under pole discrepancy

condition
1: enable
0: disable

62

En_MPF_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when multi-phase fault

happens

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

140

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

1: enable
0: disable

En_3PF_Blk_AR

enable auto-reclosing blocked when three-phase fault

happens
1: enable
0: disable

64

En_PhVolt_Syn

enable phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage as

synchronism voltage
1: phase voltage
0: phase-to-phase voltage

65

En_SynChk_AR

enable synchronism check

1: enable
0: disable

66

En_DdB_DdL_AR

enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check

1: enable
0: disable

En_LvB_DdL_AR

enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check

1: enable
0: disable

En_DdB_LvL_AR

enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check

1: enable
0: disable

En_NoChk_AR

enable AR without voltage check and synchronism check

1: enable
0: disable

En_AR

enable auto-reclosing
1: enable
0: disable

En_SetOpt_AR

select AR mode by logic setting

1: AR mode determined by internal logic settings
0: AR mode determined by external binary inputs

En_1P_AR

enable 1-pole auto-reclosing mode when the logic setting

[En_SetOpt_AR] set as 1
1: enable
0: disable

En_3P_AR

enable 3-pole auto-reclosing mode when the logic setting

[En_SetOpt_AR] set as 1
1: enable
0: disable

En_1/3P_AR

enable 1/3-pole auto-reclosing mode when the logic setting

[En_SetOpt_AR] set as 1
1: enable
0: disable

63

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

Setting Description

1.

En_Z_DPFC

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

141

Chapter 8 Settings

For short transmission line, if the secondary value of line impedance is less than 1/IN, DPFC
distance protection should be disabled.
2.

En_FD_Ctrl_TT

If the setting is set as 1, transfer tripping controlled by local fault detector. Local trip circuit could
be active by remote command (i.e. [VBI_RecvTT]=1) only when local fault detector initiates. if do
not use transfer tripping, the setting should be set as 1.
3.

En_LineVT

If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement comes from line side (for example, 3/2
breaker), it should be set as 1. If three-phase voltage comes from busbar side, it should be set as
0.
1: Three phase voltage is from line voltage, synchronism voltage is single-phase voltage from bus
voltage
0: Three phase voltage is from bus voltage, synchronism voltage is single-phase voltage from line
voltage
Note!

The setting must be set carefully. The no-voltage check and the synchronous check will
determine the locations of line voltage and busbar voltage on the basis of the setting. If the
setting is mistaken, the mistaken judgment may be made.
4.

En_PSBR

The function of power swing blocking for zone 1,2 of distance element;
1: enable; zone 1,2 of distance element is controlled by PSB element.
0: disable; zone 1,2 of distance element is not controlled by PSBR element, and power swing
blocking for zone 1,2 of distance element is released all along.
5.

En_Z2SOTF_AR3P

6.

En_Z3SOTF_AR3P

If the setting is set as 1, zone2, 3 of distance element for auto-reclosing SOTF is enabled. If the
power swing does not occur after reclosing, the corresponding zone of distance protection which is
not controlled by power swing block will trip after a shorter time delay than [t_PG2] or [t_PP2] and
[t_PG3] or [t_PP3].
7.

En_3P_Trip

If it is set as 1, three-pole tripping will be implemented for any fault but auto-reclosing is not
blocked.
8.

En_SetOpt_AR

When the setting is set as 1, AR mode can be selected by logic settings [En_1P_AR], single-pole
142

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 8 Settings

AR, [En_3P_AR], three-pole AR, and [En_1/3P_AR], single-pole and three-pole AR. Conversely, if
it is set as 0, AR mode can be selected by switch on the panel. Please refer to section 6.3.6.

8.5 Equipment VEBI Settings

Virtual enable binary input (VEBI) is a kind of special logic setting to enable protection functions.
These virtual binary inputs can be configured through local HMI or remote PC, no matter logic
setting [En_Remote_Cfg] is 1 or not.
Table 8.5-1 Virtual enabling binary input settings
No.

1.

VEBI setting

Remark

En_Remote_Cfg

0: disable
1: enable

VEBI_DiffP

enable pilot protection

VEBI_DistP

enable distance protection

VEBI_ROC

enable directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

VEBI_OC

enable directional phase overcurrent protection

VEBI_Lockout

enable auto-reclosing blocking

En_Remote_Cfg

This setting is used to determine whether the protection settings can be modified remotely via
SCADA or RTU. 1 means that settings can be remotely configured via SCADA or RTU, otherwise,
it should be set to 0.
Each VEBI setting is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection is in service,
when this relay is energized. Through SAS or RTU, the VEBI settings can be set as 1 or 0;
and it means that the relevant protection can be in service or out of service through remote
command. It provides convenience for operation management.
These virtual binary inputs provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service
or out of service remotely away from an unattended substation.
Except for [VEBI_Lockout], logic relation between these virtual enable binary inputs mentioned in
the table and corresponding logic setting is AND. If it is set as 1, auto-reclosing will be locked out.
It should be set as 0 generally.

8.6 GOOSE VEBI Settings

The protection device configured with the GOOSE function is set with the VEBI setting used for
GOOSE sending and GOOSE receiving. It can provide up to 12 VEBI settings used for GOOSE
receiving and 12 VEBI settings used for GOOSE sending. These GOOSE VEBI settings can be
modified remotely or locally.
Table 8.6-1 GOOSE virtual enabling binary input settings

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

143

Chapter 8 Settings

No.

GOOSE VEBI

Range

Remark

GVEBI_Remote_Cfg

0, 1

When it is allowed that the GOOSE VEBI settings

are modified remotely by SCADA, it will be set as
1. Otherwise, it shall be set as 0. This setting can
only be modified locally.

GVEBI_Recv_xx

0, 1

The protection device can configure up to 12

GOOSE VEBI settings used for GOOSE receiving.
(xx: from 00 to 11)

0, 1

The protection device can configure up to 12

GOOSE VEBI settings used for GOOSE sending.
(xx: from 00 to 11)

144

GVEBI_Send_xx

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via an RS232 port on the front panel. Furthermore,
remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation system via an
RS485 port. The operator is able to check the protective device status at any time.
This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator a instruction about how
to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including mean current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. In the same time, how to
change active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in
details.

9.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.

5
ALARM

xx

VT ALARM

xx

AR READY

xx

CH A ALARM

xx

CH B ALARM

xx

TRIP A

xx

TRIP B

xx

TRIP C

xx

RECLOSE

xx

PCS - 931
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY

ENT
ESC

xx

GR
P

HEALTHY

3
4

Figure 9.1-1 The front panel

The function of HMI module:
No.

Item

Description

LCD

A 320240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim

lighting conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed
when there is operation implemented.

LED

20 status indication LEDs (10 defined LEDs and 10

configurable LEDs)

Keypad

Numeric keypad and command keys for full access to the relay

Communication port

DB9 RS232 port for communication with a PC for local

communication

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

145

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Logo

Type and designation and manufacturer of protection device

9.1.1 Keypad Operation

Figure 9.1-2 Keypad buttons

1.

2.

3.

ESC:

Cancel the operation

Quit the current menu

ENT:

Execute the operation

Confirm the interface

GRP

4.

5.

6.

Activate the switching interface of setting group

leftward and rightward direction keys ( and ):

Move the cursor horizontally

Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu

upward and downward direction keys ( and )

Move the cursor vertically

Select command menu within the same level of menu

plus and minus sign keys ( and )

Modify the value

Modify and display the message number

Page up/down

9.1.2 LED Indications

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the HEALTHY LED should be on
all the time. Only with serious fault (such as chip damage, check error of setting, etc.) will the
146

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

HEALTHY LED go out and the protection device be blocked.

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the ALARM LED should go out.
Only when abnormal situations except channel abnormity and VT circuit failure happen, will the
signal indicator lamp be lightened. This signal lamp goes out automatically when the abnormal
situations disappear.

After the protection device is energized, if it works normally, the VT ALARM LED shall not be on.
Only when the secondary circuit of busbar VT or line VT fails, will the VT ALARM LED be
lightened. Moreover, it will go out automatically in 10 seconds after the abnormal situations
disappear.

After the protection device is energized, the AR READY LED shall go out. Only when all the
charging conditions for automatic reclosure are met can the AR READY LED be lightened after
10s. After the reclosing is executed for one shot, the AR READY LED will go out automatically.

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the CH A ALARM LED should go
out. Only when the channel A has error codes or invalid data frames, etc. will the signal indicator
lamp be lightened.

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the CH B ALARM LED should go
out. Only when the channel B has error codes or invalid data frames, etc. will the signal indicator
lamp be lightened.

After the protection device is energized, normally the TRIP A LED should go out. Only when the
protection device sends out phase A tripping signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

After the protection device is energized, normally the TRIP B LED should go out. Only when the
protection device sends out phase A tripping signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

147

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

After the protection device is energized, normally the TRIP C LED should go out. Only when the
protection device sends out phase A tripping signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

After the protection device is energized, normally the RECLOSE LED should go out. Only when
the protection device sends out reclosing signal will the signal lamp be lightened.
Note!

Another 10 LED indicators are programmable and user can configure them to be lit by
signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to
requirement through PCS-PC software.

9.1.3 Communication Port

Figure 9.1-3 Communication ports

It is used to access the hardware of the protection device via HyperTerminal. This port is only used
to monitor the communication state by engineering debugging personnel and debug the program
by developers.

9.1.4 Communication
The MON module is comprised by embedded processor of high performance, FLASH, SRAM,
SDRAM, Ethernet controller and other peripheral equipments. It can realize the management,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording of the whole device. The MON
module uses the data of other modules in the receiver device of internal bus, and communicates
with LCD panel via RS-485 bus.

148

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

NR1102C

ETHERNET 1

Communication with SCADA, support IEC61850 and IEC60870-5-103 protocol

ETHERNET 2

Communication with SCADA, support IEC61850 and IEC60870-5-103 protocol

ETHERNET

Network A
Network B

SYN+
SYNSHLD
GND
RXD
TXD
SGND
GND

101

SYN+

102

SYN-

103

SHLD

104

GND

105

RXD

106

TXD

107

SGND

108

GND

Connect differential synchronization bus, support PPS and IRIG-B

Connect the printer; both the receiving and sending directions of which are
stated on the basis of the device.

Figure 9.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

Take NR1102C as an example, its rear view and the definition of terminals are shown as Figure
9.1-4. This module is equipped with two 100BaseT Ethernet interface, PPS/IRIG-B differential
synchronization interface and RS-232 printer interface.
The Ethernet interface can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-PC) by
connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-PC). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu SETTINGSEQUIP_SETTINS, it should be ensured that the protection
device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address and subnet
mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as 198.87.96.102, subnet mask is set as 255.255.255.0
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_Addr_NetA]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Subnet_Mask_A]=255.255.255.0, [En_NetA]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except
102)

9.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

9.2.1 Overview
Press of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by and
. Enter the selected submenu by pressing ENT or . Press and return to the previous
menu. Press ESC and exit the main menu directly. For sake of executing the command menu
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

149

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

again, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Five latest
menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. When the five menu commands are
recorded, the latest menu command will cover the earliest one, adopting the first in first out
principle. It is arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command
menus. Press to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

For the first powered protective device, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

INTERFACE
TEST_MODE
VERSION
CLOCK
LOCAL_CTRL
SETTINGS
PRINT
REPORT
VALUES

150

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Figure 9.2-1 Menu tree

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

151

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Under the main interface, press to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing ,
and ENT. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.

9.2.2 VALUES
This menu is mainly used to display the real time sampling value of current, voltage and phase
angle and the state of binary inputs (including binary inputs via opto-coupler and GOOSE binary
inputs) and alarm signals in the protection device. Besides, the communication state of optical
fibre channel and sampling channel by ECVT are also be checked. This menu fully reflects the
running environment of the protection device. As long as the displayed values consist with the
actual running situation, basically, the protection device can work normally. This menu is set to
greatly facilitate the debugging and maintenance of people on site.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

CPU_METERING

Display the measured value of current and voltage by DSP

module used for protection function calculation

MON_METERING

Display the measured value of current by DSP module used

for fault detector

PHASE_ANGLE

Display the phase angle of current and voltage

BI_STATE

Display the state of binary inputs which are the result of AND
operation of GOOSE BI STATE and OPT BI STATE

OPT_BI_STATE

Display the state of binary inputs via opto-coupler

GOOSE_BI_STATE

Display the state of binary inputs via GOOSE

ALM_STATE

Display the state of alarm signals

COMM_CH_STATE

Displays the state of communication channel. Please refer to

section 3.5.2.13

SMPL_CH_STATE

Displays the state of AC sample channel (only when ECVT is

adopted, this menu is useful)

9.2.3 REPORT
This menu is used to display the fault reports, self-supervision reports, binary input change reports
and control reports, so that the operator can load to view and use as the reference of analyzing
accidents and maintaining the protection device. All the reports are stored in non-volatile memory,
it can still record the reports even if it loses its power.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

TRP_REPORT

Display fault reports of the protective device

ALM_REPORT

Display self-supervision reports of the protection device

BI_CHG_REPORT

Display binary input change reports of the protection device

CTRL_REPORT

Display control reports of the protection device

152

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.2.4 PRINT
This menu is used for printing device description, setting, fault reports, self-supervision reports,
binary input change reports, waveform, information related with IEC60870-5-103 Protocol,
channel state and channel statistic.
This menu includes the following command menus and submenus.
No.

Item

Function description

EQUIP_DESCRON

Print the description information of protection device

SETTINGS

Print the protection device setting, including equipment

parameters, system parameters, protection settings, virtual
enabling binary input settings (VEBI settings) and GOOSE
VEBI settings. It can print by different classifications as well as
printing all settings of the protection device. Besides, it can
also print out the latest modified setting item

TRP_REPORT

Print the fault reports

ALM_REPORT

Print the self-supervision reports

BI_CHG_REPORT

Print the binary input change reports

CH_SELF_CHECK

Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel, which

is made of some hexadecimal characters and used to
developer analyze channel state

CH_STATISTIC

Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel, which is

formed A.M. 9:00 every day

PRESENT_VALUES

Print the current state of the protection device, including the

sampling value of voltage and current, the state of binary
inputs, setting and so on

WAVEFORM

Print the recorded waveform

10

PROTOCOL

Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),

information serial number (INF), general classification service
group number, and channel number (ACC)

11

CANCEL_PRINT

Cancel print

The submenu SETTINGS includes the following command menus.

No.

Item

Function description

EQUIP_SETTINGS

Print the equipment parameters

EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS

Print the virtual enabling binary input settings

GOOSE_VEBI_SETTINGS

Print GOOSE virtual enabling binary input settings

SYS_SETTINGS

Print the system parameters

PROT_SETTINGS

Print the protection settings

ALL_SETTINGS

Print all settings including equipment parameters, system

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

153

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

parameters, protection
GOOSE VEBI settings
7

LATEST_MODIFIED

settings,

VEBI

settings

and

Print the setting latest modified

The submenu CH_SELF_CHECK includes the following command menus.

No.

Item

Function description

Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel A, which is made

of some hexadecimal characters and used to developer analyze
channel state

CHA

The submenu CH_STATISTIC includes the following command menus.

No.

Item

Function description

Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel A, which is formed A.M.
9:00 every day

CHA

The submenu WAVEFORM includes the following command menus.

No.

Item

Function description

SMPL_WAVE

Includes branch current/voltage waveform and operation sequence

diagram of each binary inputs

9.2.5 SETTINGS
This menu is used to check the equipment parameters, system parameters, protection settings,
VEBI settings and GOOSE VEBI settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items.
Moreover, it can also execute the setting copy between different setting groups.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

EQUIP_SETTINGS

Check or modify the equipment parameters

EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS

Check or modify the virtual enabling binary input settings

GOOSE_VEBI_SETTINGS

Check or modify GOOSE virtual enabling binary input

settings

SYS_SETTINGS

Check or modify the system parameters

PROT_SETTINGS

Check or modify the protection settings

COPY_SETTINGS

Copy setting between different setting groups

9.2.6 LOCAL CONTROL

This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display and binary
inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the current waveform data of the
protection device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS. Besides, it can send out
the request of program download, clear GOOSE reports and state statistics of optical fibre channel
and confirm time delay of sampling channel via ECVT.
154

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

This menu includes the following command menus.

No.

Item

Function description

TARG_RESET

Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on

TRIG_OSCILLOG

Trigger waveform recording

CLR_STATE

Clear the state statistics of optical fibre channel

DOWNLOAD

Send out the request of downloading program

CLR_GOOSE_RPT_STA

Clear statistic reports of GOOSE

CONF_SMPL_CH_DLY

Confirm time delay of sampling channel (only when ECVT is

adopted, this menu is useful)

9.2.7 CLOCK
It is used to display and modify the current date and time of the protection device.

9.2.8 VERSION
It is used to check the information like the program version of each intelligent module in the
protection device and the program generating time.

9.2.9 TEST_MODE
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
protection device. It can be used to check module information and tripping reports item by item,
and fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to generate all kinds of reports or events
to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description

BOARD_INFO

Check the information about each intelligent module

COMM_TEST

Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to

transmit
to
SCADA,
including
tripping
reports,
self-supervision reports and binary input change reports. It
can realize the report uploading by different classification, as
well as the uploading of all kinds of reports

ITEM_TRP_REPORT

Check the tripping report item by item

TRP_REPORT

Check the fault reports

ALM_REPORT

Check the self-supervision reports

BI_CHG_REPORT

Check the binary input change reports

CH_REPORT

Check the state of optical fibre channel

GOOSE_COMM_STATE

Check the communication state of GOOSE

GOOSE_RPT_STA

Check the statistic reports of GOOSE

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

155

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.2.10 INTERFACE
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language. This menu includes the following
command menus.
No.

Item

LANGUAGE

Function description

Set LCD display language

9.3 Understand the LCD Display

9.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm
reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will
not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the RESET button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both ENT and
ESC at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.
Binary change reports will be displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display
interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the
corresponding menu.

9.3.2 Normal Status Display

After the protection device is powered and turns into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
HEALTHY indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color
as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

The displayed content of the interface contains: the current date and time of the protection device

156

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

(with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the currently valid setting group number, the three-phase
current sampling value, the zero-sequence current sampling value, the three-phase voltage
sampling value, the zero-sequence voltage sampling value, the line voltage sampling value, line
frequency and bus frequency. if all the sampling values of the voltage and the current cant be fully
displayed within one screen, theyll be scrolling-displayed automatically from the top to the bottom.
If the device has detected any abnormal state, it will display the self-check alarm information.

9.3.3 Display Fault Report

This protection device can store 1024 times of tripping reports and 64 times of fault reports with
waveform. When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the
latest fault report, and two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on whether
there is self-check report at present.
For the situation that the fault report and the self-check report coexist, the upper half part is fault
report, and the lower half part is self-check report. As to the upper half part, it displays separately
the record number of fault report, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format of
yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss), protection element and tripping element. If there is protection element, there
is relative time on the basis of fault detector element and fault phase. At the same time, if the total
lines of protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear at the
right. The height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of protection
element and tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently displayed line
in the total lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up at the speed
of one line per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it will roll from the earliest protection
element and tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is similar to that of
the upper half part.
If the device has no self-check report, the display interface will only show the fault report.
All the possibly displayed fault reports are shown as Table 9.3-1.
Table 9.3-1 Tripping information
No.

Item

Description

Op_Z_DPFC

DPFC distance protection operating to trip

Op_DPFC_Diff1

Stage 1 of DPFC percentage differential protection operating

to trip

Op_DPFC_Diff2

Stage 2 of DPFC percentage differential protection operating

to trip

Op_Stdy_Diff1

Stage 1 of steady-state percentage differential protection

operating to trip

Op_Stdy_Diff2

Stage 2 of steady-state percentage differential protection

operating to trip

Op_REF

Zero-sequence percentage differential protection operating

to trip

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT

Phase-segregated inter-tripping element operating to trip

Op_3P_RecvTT

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating to trip

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

157

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Op_TT

Transfer trip operating

10

Op_Z1

Zone 1 of distance protection operating to trip

11

Op_Z2

Zone 2 of distance protection operating to trip

12

Op_Z3

Zone 3 of distance protection operating to trip

13

Op_Z_SOTF

Distance SOTF protection operating to trip

14

Op_Prot_PDF

Protective device operating under the pole discrepancy

15

Op_ROC_SOTF

Zero-sequence SOTF protection operating to trip

16

Op_OC1

Stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

to trip

17

Op_OC2

Stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

to trip

18

Op_OC3

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

to trip

19

Op_BFP1

Stage 1 of breaker failure protection operating to trip local

circuit breaker

20

Op_BFP2

Stage 2 of breaker failure protection operating to trip all

adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same busbar

21

Op_Z_Rev

Reversal distance protection operating to trip

Op_ROC1

Stage 1 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

operating to trip

Op_ROC2

Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

operating to trip

Op_ROC3

Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

operating to trip

Op_ROC4

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

operating to trip

22
23
24
25
26

Op_InvROC

Inverse-time
operating

27

Op_ROC_VTS

Zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating for VT

circuit failure

28

Op_OC_VTS

Phase overcurrent protection operating for VT circuit failure

29

Op_PhSelFail

Three-pole tripping for failure in fault phase selection

30

Op_1PTrpFail

Three-pole tripping for failure in single-pole tripping

31

Op_Persist1P

Three-pole tripping for single-phase operation

32

Op_AR

Auto-reclosing operating

33

Op_FD

Fault detector of the protection device operating

34

Alm_Oscillog_CPU

Sample data of DSP module (slot 2) is abnormal and

triggering waveform recording

35

Alm_Oscillog_MON

Sample data of DSP module (slot 3) is abnormal and

triggering waveform recording

36

Op_ManTrigOscillog

Recording
waveform
TRIG_OSCILLO

37

BI_TrigOscillog

Recording

158

zero-sequence

waveform

overcurrent

initiated
initiated

protection

through

through

binary

menu
input

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

[BI_TrigOscillo]
38

BO_Fail_AR

Auto-reclosing is failure

9.3.4 Display Self-supervision Report

This protection device can store self-supervision reports for 1024 times. During the running of
protection device, the self-supervision report of hardware self-check errors or system running
abnormity will be displayed immediately.
All the possibly displayed alarm messages are shown as Table 9.3-2.
Table 9.3-2 Self-supervision information
No.

Item

Description

Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU

Sample data of DSP module (slot 2) is abnormal

Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON

Sample data of DSP module (slot 3) is abnormal

Alm_Setting

Invalid settings in active setting group

Alm_DSP_CPU

DSP check of DSP module (slot 2) is error

Alm_DSP_MON

DSP check of DSP module (slot 3) is error

Alm_PersistI0

Zero-sequence overcurrent element operates for

greater than 10s

Alm_PersistFD

General fault detector element operates for greater

than 10s

Alm_VTS

Busbar VT circuit failure

Alm_VTS_Ux

Line VT circuit failure

10

Alm_CTS

CT circuit failure

11

Alm_52b

Binary input [BI_52b_Pha],

[BI_52b_Phc] are abnormal

12

Alm_TrpOut

The control chips of binary output circuit is damaged

13

Alm_Pwr_Opto

Loss of opto-coupler power supply

14

Alm_ExTrp_BI

Binary input [BI_TrpA_Other], [BI_TrpB_Other],

[BI_TrpC_Other], [BI_Trp3P_Line] or [BI_Trp3P_G/T]
is abnormal

15

Alm_ID_ChA

ID received is wrong from channel A

16

Alm_ChA

The communication channel A is abnormal

17

Alm_NoValidFram_ChA

No valid data frame is received from channel A

18

Alm_CRC_ChA

CRC check of data frame from channel A fails

19

Alm_Connect_ChA

The connection of optical fibre channel A is wrong

20

Alm_OutDiffP_ChA

The current differential protection of channel A is

disabled

21

Alm_Diff_ChA

The differential current of channel A is abnormal

22

Alm_CompParam_ChA

The compensation parameter of channel A is wrong

23

Alm_TT

The receiving or sending transfer trip is abnormal

24

Alm_EquipConfig

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is an error in

the GOOSE configuration file (i.e. GOOSE.txt).

25

Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope

Setting value is out of setting scope.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

[BI_52b_Phb]

and

159

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

26

Alm_BoardConfig

Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in

modules and the designing drawing of an
applied-specific project

27

Alm_SynChkFail_AR

Synchronism check of AR fails

28

GAlm_NetStorm_NetA

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network

storm occurring on the network A.

29

GAlm_NetStorm_NetB

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network

storm occurring on the network B.

30

GAlm_Disc_NetA

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A is

disconnected.

31

GAlm_Disc_NetB

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B is

disconnected.

32

GAlm_CfgUnmatch

The GOOSE control blocks received on network and the

GOOSE control blocks in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched.

33

GAlm_NetA_GOOSExx

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A for

GOOSExx is disconnected. (xx: from 00 to 11)

34

GAlm_NetB_GOOSExx

GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B for

GOOSExx is disconnected. (xx: from 00 to 11)

35

GAlm_CfgUnmatch_GOOSExx

The GOOSE control blocks received on network and the

GOOSE control blocks in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched.
(xx: from 00 to 11)

36

BO_BlkAR

Blocking auto-reclosing

37

BO_Inprog_AR

Initiating auto-reclosing

38

BO_Lockout

Blocking auto-reclosing

9.3.5 Display Binary Input Change Report

This protection device can store 1024 times of binary input change reports. During the running of
the protection device, the binary input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from 0 to
1 or from 1 to 0.
All the possibly displayed binary inputs are shown as Table 9.3-3, Table 9.3-4 and Table 9.3-5.
Table 9.3-3 Binary input signals
No.

Item

Description

EBI_DiffP

The binary input of enabling/disabling differential protection

EBI_DistP

The binary input of enabling/disabling distance protection

EBI_ROC

The
binary
input
of
enabling/disabling
zeros-sequence overcurrent protection

EBI_OC

The binary input of enabling/disabling directional phase

overcurrent protection

EBI_Z1

The binary input of enabling/disabling of zone 1 of distance

protection

EBI_Opt1_AR

The binary input of option 1 of AR mode

EBI_Opt2_AR

The binary input of option 2 of AR mode

160

directional

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

EBI_Lockout

The binary input of lockout auto-reclosing

BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp

The binary input of switching active setting group

10

BI_Opt2_ActiveGrp

The binary input of switching active setting group

BI_TrpA_Other

The binary input of phase A tripping from other protection

device

BI_TrpB_Other

The binary input of phase B tripping from other protection

device

BI_TrpC_Other

The binary input of phase C tripping from other protection

device

14

BI_3PTrp_Line

The binary input of three-phase tripping from line protection

15

BI_3PTrp_G/T

The binary input of three-phase tripping from generator or

transformer protection

16

BI_52b_Pha

The binary input of normally closed contact of phase A circuit

breaker

17

BI_52b_Phb

The binary input of normally closed contact of phase B circuit

breaker

18

BI_52b_Phc

The binary input of normally closed contact of phase C circuit

breaker

19

BI_LowPres_AR

The binary input of low pressure to block auto-reclosing

20

BI_TrigOscillog

The binary input of initiating recording waveform manually

21

BI_MCB_VT_Line

The binary input of line VT is out of service

22

BI_MCB_VT_Bus

The binary input of busbar VT is out of service

23

BI_Send_TT

The binary input of sending transfer trip to remote end

24

BI_Send1_TS

The binary input of sending transfer signal 1 to remote end

25

BI_Send2_TS

The binary input of sending transfer signal 2 to remote end

26

VBI_RecvTT_ChA

The virtual binary input of receiving transfer trip from remote

end via optical fibre channel A

27

VBI_RecvTS1_ChA

The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 1 from

remote end via optical fibre channel A

28

VBI_RecvTS2_ChA

The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 2 from

remote end via optical fibre channel A

29

VBI_RecvTT

The virtual binary input of receiving transfer trip from remote

end via optical fibre channel

30

VBI_RecvTS1

The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 1 from

remote end via optical fibre channel

31

VBI_RecvTS2

The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 2 from

remote end via optical fibre channel

32

VBI_DiffP_Rmt

The virtual binary input of indicating the state of differential

protection on remote end via optical fibre channel

33

VEBI_DiffP

The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling differential protection

34

VEBI_DistP

The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling distance protection

35

VEBI_ROC

The
VEBI
setting
of
enabling/disabling
zero-sequence overcurrent protection

11
12
13

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

directional

161

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

36

VEBI_Lockout

The VEBI setting of lockout auto-reclosing

37

VEBI_OC

The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling directional phase

overcurrent protection

38

BI_Pulse_GPS

The binary input of receiving

synchronization from GPS

39

BI_Print

The binary input of triggering printing report

40

BI_BlkComm

The binary input of blocking

equipment with the SAS system

41

BI_RstTarg

The binary input of initiating reset of latching signal and LCD

displaying

pulse

signal

communication

for

time

between

Note!

For binary signals [BI_Pulse_GPS], [BI_Print], [BI_BlkComm] and [BI_RstTarg], they are
not logged in the event recorder and only are viewed on the LCD through menu BI
STATE
Table 9.3-4 Binary input signals via opto-coupler
No.

Item

Description

EBI_Lockout_OPT

The binary input of lockout auto-reclosing via opto-coupler

BI_TrpA_Other_OPT

The binary input of phase A tripping from other protection

device via opto-coupler

BI_TrpB_Other_OPT

The binary input of phase B tripping from other protection

device via opto-coupler

BI_TrpC_Other_OPT

The binary input of phase C tripping from other protection

device via opto-coupler

BI_3PTrp_Line_OPT

The binary input of three-phase tripping from line protection via

opto-coupler

BI_3PTrp_G/T_OPT

The binary input of three-phase tripping from generator or

transformer protection via opto-coupler

BI_52b_PhA_OPT

The binary input of normally closed contact of phase A circuit

breaker via opto-coupler

BI_52b_PhB_OPT

The binary input of normally closed contact of phase B circuit

breaker via opto-coupler

BI_52b_PhC_OPT

The binary input of normally closed contact of phase C circuit

breaker via opto-coupler

10

BI_LowPres_AR_OPT

The binary input of low pressure to block auto-reclosing via

opto-coupler

11

BI_Send_TT_OPT

The binary input of sending transfer trip to remote end via

opto-coupler

12

BI_Send1_TS_OPT

The binary input of sending transfer signal 1 to remote end via

opto-coupler

13

BI_Send2_TS_OPT

The binary input of sending transfer signal 2 to remote end via

opto-coupler

162

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

14

BI_Sparexx_OPT

Reversed binary input via opto-coupler (xx: from 00 to 09)

Table 9.3-5 GOOSE binary input signals

No.

Item

Description

GBI_Lockout1

GBI_Lockout2

GBI_Lockout3

GBI_Lockout4

GBI_Lockout5

GBI_TrpA_Other

GOOSE binary input of phase B tripping from other protection

device

GBI_TrpB_Other

GOOSE binary input of phase B tripping from other protection

device

GBI_TrpC_Other

GOOSE binary input of phase B tripping from other protection

device

GBI_3PTrp_Line

GOOSE binary input of three-phase tripping from line protection

10

GBI_3PTrp_G/T1

11

GBI_3PTrp_G/T2

12

GBI_3PTrp_G/T3

13

GBI_3PTrp_G/T4

14

GBI_3PTrp_G/T5

15

GBI_52b_PhA

GOOSE binary input of normally closed contact of phase A

circuit breaker

16

GBI_52b_PhB

GOOSE binary input of normally closed contact of phase B

circuit breaker

17

GBI_52b_PhC

GOOSE binary input of normally closed contact of phase C

circuit breaker

18

GBI_LowPres_AR

GOOSE binary input of low pressure to block auto-reclosing

19

GBI_Send_TT1

20

GBI_Send_TT2

21

GBI_Send_TT3

22

GBI_Send_TT4

23

GBI_Send1_TS1

24

GBI_Send1_TS2

25

GBI_Send1_TS3

26

GBI_Send1_TS4

27

GBI_Send2_TS1

28

GBI_Send2_TS2

29

GBI_Send2_TS3

30

GBI_Send2_TS4

31

GVEBI_Recv_xx

GOOSE virtual enabling binary input setting of receiving

function (xx: from 00 to 11)

32

GVEBI_Send_xx

GOOSE virtual enabling binary input setting of sending function

GOOSE binary input of blocking AR

GOOSE binary input of three-phase tripping from generator or

transformer protection

GOOSE binary input of sending transfer trip to remote end via

opto-coupler

GOOSE binary input of sending transfer signal 1 to remote end

via opto-coupler

GOOSE binary input of sending transfer signal 2 to remote end

via opto-coupler

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

163

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

(xx: from 00 to 11)

9.3.6 Display Control Report

This protection device can store the control report for 1024 times. During the running of the
protection device, the control report will be displayed after any operation of it is conducted.
All the possibly displayed control reports are shown as Table 9.3-6.
Table 9.3-6 Control reports
No.

Item

Description

Reboot

The protective equipment has been reboot.

Reset_Target

The protective equipment has been reset.

Settings_Chg

The settings of protective equipment have been changed.

ActiveGrp_Chgd

Active setting group has been changed.

Report_Cleared

All reports have been deleted.

Waveform_Cleared

All waveforms have been deleted.

SubProcess_Exit

Subprocess has exited.

9.4 Keypad Operation

9.4.1 View Device Status
The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the VALUES menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);

5.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

6.

Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the VALUES menu);

9.4.2 View Device Report

The operation is as follows:

164

1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the REPORT menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

4.

Press the or to page up/down;

5.

Press the or to select pervious or next record;

6.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7.

Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the REPORT menu);

For the fault report, view the single item tripping report by the command menu
ITEM_TRP_REPORT, and the item tripping report produces with change of any item of fault
report. The item tripping reports can save for 1024 times at most.
The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the TEST_MODE menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu ITEM_TRP_REPORT,

and then press the ENT to enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to select pervious or next record;

5.

Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the TEST_MODE menu).

9.4.3 View Module Information

The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the TEST_MODE menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu BOARD_INFO, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to move the scroll bar;

5.

Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the TEST_MODE menu).

9.4.4 Print Device Report

The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the PRINT menu, and then press the ENT
or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

Selecting the TRP_REPORT, and then

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

165

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Press the or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing..., and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT). If
the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will
display Printer Busy. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT).

Selecting the command menu ALM_REPORT or BI_CHG_REPORT, and then

Press the or to move the cursor. Press the or to select the starting and ending
numbers of printing message. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing..., and
then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT). Press the ESC to exit this
menu (returning to the menu PRINT).
4.

If selecting the command menu PROTOCOL, PRESENT_VALUES or

EQUIP_DESCRON, press the ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing..., and then
automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT);

5.

If selecting the WAVEFORM or SETTINGS, press the ENT or to enter the next
level of menu;

6.

After entering the submenu SETTINGS, press or to move the cursor, and then
press the ENT to print the corresponding default value. If selecting the
PROT_SETTINGS or ALL_SETTINGS:

Press the or to select the setting zone to be printed. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing..., and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
SETTINGS). Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).
7.

After entering the submenu WAVEFORM, press the ENT to enter the SMPL_WAVE.
Without waveform data, the LCD will display No Wave Form Data! (Before executing
the command menu SMPL_WAVE, it is necessary to execute the command menu
TRIG_OSCILLOG in the menu LOCAL_CTRL, otherwise the LCD will display No
Waveform Data!). With waveform data existing:

Press the or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing..., and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
WAVEFORM). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and
the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu
WAVEFORM).

9.4.5 View Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

166

1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the SETTINGS menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

4.

Press the or to move the cursor;

5.

Press the + or - to page up/down;

6.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7.

Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).
Note!

If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

9.4.6 Modify Device Setting

The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the SETTINGS menu, and then press
the ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to move the cursor;

5.

Press the + or - to page up/down;

6.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7.

Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS );

8.

If selecting the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS, move the cursor to the setting
item to be modified, and then press the ENT;

Press the or to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the or
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the or to modify the value), press the
ESC to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
EQUIP_SETTINGS. Press the ENT to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS).
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the , or ESC, and the LCD will display Save or Not?. Directly press the ESC or
press the or to move the cursor. Select the Cancel, and then press the ENT to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
EQUIP_SETTINGS).
Press the or to move the cursor. Select No and press the ENT, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).
Press the or to move the cursor to select Yes, and then press the ENT, the LCD will
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

167

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

display password input interface.

Password:

Input a 4-bit password (, , or ). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,

and then press the ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS. If the password is correct, LCD will display Save
Settings, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
EQUIP_SETTINGS), with all modified setting items as modified values.
Note!

For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.
9.

If
selecting
the
command
menu
EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS
or
GOOSE_VEBI_SETTINGS, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the ENT;

10. If selecting the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS, move the cursor to the default
item to be modified, press the ENT
Note!

After modifying the parameter settings of the device, the HEALTHY indicator lamp of the
protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and
re-check the protection setting. If the check does not pass, the protection device will be
blocked.
11. If selecting the command menu PROT_SETTING, the LCD will display the following
interface:

168

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

5. PROT_SETTINGS
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group:

01

Selected Group:

02

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the ENT to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the ENT to enter.
Note!

After modifying the equipment parameter of the device, the HEALTHY indicator lamp of
the protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and
re-check the protection setting. If the check does not pass, the protection device will be
blocked.

9.4.7 Copy Device Setting

The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the SETTINGS menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu COPY_SETTINGS,

and then press the ENT to enter the menu.

Press the or to modify the value. Press the ESC, and return to the menu SETTINGS.
Press the ENT, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
SETTINGS. If the password is correct, the LCD will display Copy Settings Success!, and exit
this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).

9.4.8 Switch Setting Group

The operation is as follows:
1.

Exit the main menu;

2.

Press the GRP

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

169

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the ENT, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the ESC to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the HEALTHY indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check does not pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.

9.4.9 Delete Device Message

The operation is as follows:
1.

Exit the main menu;

2.

Press the , , , and ENT; Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to
the original state). Press the ENT to carry out the deletion.
Note!

The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection
device, including fault report, self-supervision report and binary input change report.
Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of the function
shall be cautious.

9.4.10 Modify Device Clock

The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the CLOCK menu, and then press the
ENT to enter clock display

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;

4.

Press the + or - to modify value, and then press the ENT to save the modification
and return to the main menu;

5.

Press the ESC to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

9.4.11 Check Software Version

The operation is as follows:

170

1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the VERSION menu, and then press the
ENT to display the software version;

3.

Press the ESC to return to the main menu.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.4.12 Communication Test

The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the TEST_MODE menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu COMM_TEST, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Entering
Communication Test;

4.

Press the or to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu All
Test, Trip Test, Alarm Test and BI Test.
Note!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication test and return to the
TEST_MODE menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Communication Test Timeout
and Exiting.
5.

If selecting the All Test, press the ENT, and the device will successively carry out the
Trip Test, Alarm Test and BI Test.

6.

If selecting the Trip Test, Alarm Test or BI Test, press the ENT.

7.

Press the + or - to page up/down, and then press the or to move the scroll bar.
(taking the Trip Test as an example):

Move the cursor to select the corresponding protection elements. Press the ENT to execute the
communication test one by one, the SAS will receive the corresponding fault report, and view the
fault report produced by communication test in the command menu ITEM_TRP_REPORT.
Note!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the TEST_MODE menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Communication
Test Timeout and Exiting.
If selecting the Alarm Test or BI Test, not only the SAS can receive the corresponding
self-check report or binary signals, but also the self-check report or binary signals
produced by communication test can be respectively viewed by the two command menus
of ALM_REPORT and BI_CHG_REPORT in the menu REPORT.
8.

Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu TEST_MODE, at this moment,
the LCD will display Communication Test Exiting.
Note!

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

171

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

The LCD interface provided in this chapter is a mere reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual protection device may be
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

172

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

Chapter 10 Communications
10.1 General Description
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the submenu EQUIP_SETTINGS.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface
This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485
serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a
remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the products connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination

The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120 (Ohm) Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

173

Chapter 10 Communications

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the products chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing

It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.
Note!

174

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

It is extremely important that the 120 termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will
result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NARI-RELAYS cannot assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a
result of incorrect application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)
as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu
EQUIP_SETTINGS.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

175

Chapter 10 Communications

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports
to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings to the protective
device must be configured.

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the
protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NARI-RELAYS.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (reset)

Time synchronization

Event record extraction

General interrogation

General commands

Disturbance records

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

10.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective
device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference
is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
176

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified
in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then
the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to
set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via
the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time
taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:

Type identification (TYP)

Function type (FUN)

Information number (INF)

All spontaneous events can be gained by printing, implementing submenu PROTOCOL in the
menu PRINT.

10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

10.3.6 General Service

The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the
protective device, and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and
ASDU 10. For more details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
All general classification service group numbers can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
PROTOCOL in the menu PRINT.
Note!

If the setting [En_Remote_Cfg] in the submenu EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS is set as 0,

to modify protection settings remotely will not be allowed. Moreover, equipment
parameters are not allowed to be modified remotely whether the item [En_Remote_Cfg] is
1 or 0.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

177

Chapter 10 Communications

10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to eight disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault
detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
PROTOCOL in the menu PRINT.

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. It is properly developed by NARI-RELAYS too. All the service of this relay is based on
generic functions of the IEC60870-5-103. The following table lists all the group number of this relay.
And this relay will send all the relevant information about group caption to the SAS or RTU after
establishing a successful communication link.
Group Number

Group Caption Description

Device Description

Device Parameter

Setting Group

Setting

Virtual Enabling BI

Measurement

10

Fault Data

11

Net Setting

12

Enabling BI

13

Operation Element

14

Alarm Info

15

Disturbance Info List

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol

10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC 61850-2: Glossary

IEC 61850-3: General requirements

178

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

IEC 61850-4: System and project management

IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
Principles and models
IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
Common data classes
IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

10.5.2 Communication profiles

The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the submenu EQUIP_SETTINGS.
1.

MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2.

Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

179

Chapter 10 Communications

3.

Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
4.

Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IEC
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.

10.5.3 Server data organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information
about the IED logical device.
10.5.3.1 Digital status values

The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.5.3.2 Analog values

Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
180

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

10.5.3.3 Protection logical nodes

The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-900 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

PDIF: current differential and transfer trip

PDIS: phase-to-phase distance, phase-to-ground distance and SOTF distance

PTUC: undercurrent

PTOC: phase overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent and overcurrent when CTS

PTUV: undervoltage

PTUF: underfrequency

PTOV: overvoltage and auxiliary overvoltage

PSCH: Protection scheme

RREC: automatic reclosing

RSYN: Synchronism-check

RFLO: Fault locator

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags PTRC.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PTOC1 is PTOC1.ST.Op.general. For the
PCS-900 series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

181

Chapter 10 Communications

the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
10.5.3.4 LLN0 and other logical nodes

Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:

LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the operate outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of operate outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new operate of PTRC.
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers
to the IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the
trigger mode.

10.5.4 Server features and configuration

10.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered reporting

IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

Bit 1: Data-change
Bit 4: Integrity
Bit 5: General interrogation

182

OptFlds: Option Fields.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

Bit 1: Sequence-number
Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
Bit 4: Data-set-name
Bit 5: Data-reference
Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
Bit 8: Conf-revision
Bit 9: Segmentation

IntgPd: Integrity period.

BufTm: Buffer time.

10.5.4.2 File transfer

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.
10.5.4.3 Timestamps

The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.5.4.4 Logical node name prefixes

IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:

A five or six-character name prefix.

A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.5.4.5 GOOSE services

IEC61850 specifies the type of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

183

Chapter 10 Communications

VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also Devices that transmit GOOSE messages
also function as servers. Each GOOSE publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure
and control the transmission.
The transmission is also controlled via device setting GOOSE Group ID in the setting submenu
EQUIP SETUP. The GOOSE Group ID setting item defines a definite IED group in which the
IED can communicate with each other via GOOSE protocol, and if GOOSE Group ID is configured
to 0, GOOSE service is blocked in this IED. IEC61850 recommends a default priority value of 4
for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a default priority of 1. More
details are specified in IEC61850 part 8-1. IEC61850 recommends that the Ether-type Application
ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source.
The PCS-931 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
The general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1.

Configure the transmission data

2.

Configure the transmission dataset

3.

Configure the GOOSE service settings

The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.

Configure the GOOSE service settings

2.

Configure the reception data

10.5.5 ACSI Conformance

10.5.5.1 ACSI basic conformance statement
Services

Client

Server

PCS-900 Series

Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)

C1

C1

SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used

B22

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used

B23

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used

B24

SCSM: other

B12

Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)

Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

184

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

B31

Publisher side

B32

Subscriber side

Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side
B42

Subscriber side

Y
Y

N
N

Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y:

Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.5.2 ACSI models conformance statement
Services

Client

Server

PCS-900 Series

M1

Logical device

C2

C2

M2

Logical node

C3

C3

M3

Data

C4

C4

M4

Data set

C5

C5

M5

Substitution

M6

Setting group control

Reporting
M7

Buffered report control

M7-1

sequence-number

M7-2

report-time-stamp

M7-3

reason-for-inclusion

M7-4

data-set-name

M7-5

data-reference

M7-6

buffer-overflow

M7-7

entryID

M7-8

BufTm

M7-9

IntgPd

M7-10

GI

M8

Unbuffered report control

M8-1

sequence-number

M8-2

report-time-stamp

M8-3

reason-for-inclusion

M8-4

data-set-name

M8-5

data-reference

M8-6

BufTm

M8-7

IntgPd

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

185

Chapter 10 Communications

Logging
M9

Log control

M9-1

IntgPd

M10

Log

M12

GOOSE

M13

GSSE

M14

Multicast SVC

M15

Unicast SVC

M16

Time

M17

File transfer

GSE

Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y:

Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.5.3 ACSI Services conformance statement
Service

Server/Publisher

PCS-900 Series

Server
S1

ServerDirectory

Application association
S2

Associate

S3

Abort

S4

Release

Logical device
S5

LogicalDeviceDirectory

Logical node
S6

LogicalNodeDirectory

S7

GetAllDataValues

S8

GetDataValues

S9

SetDataValues

S10

GetDataDirectory

S11

GetDataDefinition

Data

186

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

Data set
S12

GetDataSetValues

S13

SetDataSetValues

S14

CreateDataSet

S15

DeleteDataSet

S16

GetDataSetDirectory

Substitution
S17

SetDataValues

Setting group control

S18

SelectActiveSG

M/O

S19

SelectEditSG

M/O

S20

SetSGValuess

M/O

S21

ConfirmEditSGValues

M/O

S22

GetSGValues

M/O

S23

GetSGCBValues

M/O

Reporting

Buffered report control block

S24

Report

S24-1

data-change

S24-2

qchg-change

S24-3

data-update

S25

GetBRCBValues

S26

SetBRCBValues

Unbuffered report control block

S27

Report

S27-1

data-change

S27-2

qchg-change

S27-3

data-update

S28

GetURCBValues

S29

SetURCBValues

Logging

Log control block

S30

GetLCBValues

S31

SetLCBValues

S32

QueryLogByTime

S33

QueryLogAfter

S34

GetLogStatusValues

Log

Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE control block

S35

SendGOOSEMessage

S36

GetGoReference

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

187

Chapter 10 Communications

S37

GetGOOSEElementNumber

S38

GetGoCBValues

S39

SetGoCBValuess

S51

Select

S52

SelectWithValue

S53

Cancel

S54

Operate

S55

Command-Termination

S56

TimeActivated-Operate

Control

File transfer
S57

GetFile

M/O

S58

SetFile

S59

DeleteFile

S60

GetFileAttributeValues

M/O

Time

SNTP

10.5.6 Logical Nodes

10.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table

The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes

PCS-900 Series

L: System Logical Nodes

LPHD: Physical device information

YES

LLN0: Logical node zero

YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions

PDIF: Differential
PDIR: Direction comparison
PDIS: Distance

YES

PDOP: Directional overpower

PDUP: Directional underpower

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency

PHAR: Harmonic restraint

PHIZ: Ground detector

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent

PMRI: Motor restart inhibition

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision

POPF: Over power factor

PPAM: Phase angle measuring

PSCH: Protection scheme

188

YES

YES

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault

PTEF: Transient earth fault

PTOC: Time overcurrent

PTOF: Overfrequency

YES

PTOV: Overvoltage

YES

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning

YES

PTTR: Thermal overload

PTUC: Undercurrent

PTUV: Undervoltage

YES

PUPF: Underpower factor

PTUF: Underfrequency

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent

PVPH: Volts per Hz

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

YES

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary

RDRS: Disturbance record handling

RBRF: Breaker failure

RDIR: Directional element

YES

RFLO: Fault locator

YES

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking

YES

RREC: Autoreclosing

YES

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing

YES

C: Logical Nodes For Control

CALH: Alarm handling

CCGR: Cooling group control

CILO: Interlocking

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching

CSWI: Switch controller

G: Logical Nodes For Generic References

GAPC: Generic automatic process control

YES

GGIO: Generic process I/O

YES

GSAL: Generic security application

I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving

IARC: Archiving

IHMI: Human machine interface

ITCI: Telecontrol interface

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface

A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control

ANCR: Neutral current regulator

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

189

Chapter 10 Communications

ARCO: Reactive power control

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller

AVCO: Voltage control

M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement

MDIF: Differential measurements

YES

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic

MMTR: Metering

MMXN: Non phase related measurement

MMXU: Measurement

YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance

MSTA: Metering statistics

S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges

X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear

TCTR: Current transformer

YES

TVTR: Voltage transformer

YES

Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)

YLTC: Tap changer

YPSH: Power shunt

YPTR: Power transformer

Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment

190

ZAXN: Auxiliary network

ZBAT: Battery

ZBSH: Bushing

ZCAB: Power cable

ZCAP: Capacitor bank

ZCON: Converter

ZGEN: Generator

ZGIL: Gas insulated line

ZLIN: Power overhead line

ZMOT: Motor

ZREA: Reactor

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component

ZSAR: Surge arrestor

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 10 Communications

10.6 GOOSE Service

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction
The General Object oriented substation event (GOOSE) defined in IEC61850 standard is based
on the fast Ethernet multi-broadcasting message transmission, taking place of the hard-wired
communication mode between classic intelligent electronic device (IED) and providing a fast,
efficient and reliable method for communication among logic nodes.
The GOOSE service supports the exchange of public data comprised of data sets, it is used to
protect the data transmission which requires high real-time like tripping, breaker position and
interlocked information. The information exchange of GOOSE service is based on the
publish/subscribe mechanism, and any IED device in the same GOOSE network can be
conducted as subscription terminal to receive data and as publication terminal to provide
data to other IED device as well, so that the increasing or modification of communication data
between IED devices can be realized in a much easier way.

10.6.2 GOOSE Function

The PCS-931 series devices use independent high efficient DSP board to realize GOOSE, so it
has super-high real-time property and reliability. Two 100M FDX optical fiber Ethernet interfaces
on the DSP board can be corresponded to different VLAN networks. The GOOSE dual-networks
configuration improves the reliability and stability of system.
1.

GOOSE receiving/sending mechanism

In order to ensure the real-time property and reliability of GOOSE service, GOOSE message
adopts ASN.1 code which relates to basic encoding rule (BER) and transmit data directly in
Ethernet link layer without passing through TCP/IP protocol and also adopts special
receiving/sending mechanism.
Sending of the GOOSE message adopts heartbeat message and position-altering message fast
resending combination mechanism. If the data in GOOSE data sets is not changed, the heartbeat
message whose interval is T0 will be sent, the status number (stnum) in message will not be
changed and the sequence number (sqnum) will be increased progressively. If the data in GOOSE
data set is changed, after sending a frame of position-altering message, the position-altering
message will be fast resent in the interval of T0, T1, T2, and T3. The status number (stnum) in the
message whose data is position-altered will be increased, and the sequence number (sqnum) will
be started from zero.
The GOOSE receiving can detect link interrupt according to the TATL (Time Allow to Live) in the
GOOSE message. The GOOSE data receiving mechanism can be divided into single frame
receiving and dual-frames receiving. The intelligent operation box uses dual-frames receiving
mechanism and update data after receiving two frames of messages with the same GOOSE data.
Other protection and monitoring devices use single frame receiving mechanism and update data
immediately after receiving position-altering message (stnum changed). If the status number
(stnum) in the received message is not changed, dual-frames message confirmation will be used
to update data.
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

191

Chapter 10 Communications

2.

GOOSE Alarm

GOOSE will alarm the abnormal conditions produced during receiving/sending process, the
GOOSE alarms mainly include: GOOSE network A/B network link breaking alarm, GOOSE
configuration inconformity alarm and GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm.
The GOOSE network A/B link breaking alarm is: this alarm will be produced when correct GOOSE
message is not received in 2 times of the TATL (Time Allow to Live).
The GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm is: the attribute of GOOSE control block of GOOSE
publisher and subscriber like configuration version number must be identical. Otherwise this
GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm will be produced.
The GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm is: when network-storm is produced in GOOSE
network, if data flow of network port is beyond normal range and abnormal message is produced,
this GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm will be produced.
3.

GOOSE Service

When service status of the device is set to 1, the GOOSE message sent by the device has a Test
Flag and receiving terminal can obtain service status of sending terminal by the test flag of
message. When the service status of sending terminal conforms to that of receiving terminal, the
device will carry out normal processing to the received GOOSE data. When the service status of
sending terminal doesnt conform to that of receiving terminal, the device will process the received
GOOSE data accordingly to ensure that the serviced device will not influence the normal running
of device, improving the flexibility and reliability of GOOSE service.

192

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.1 Introduction
The chapter contains instructions on how to install and commission the protective device. It can
also be used as a reference if a periodic test is performed. The chapter covers procedures for
mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings and performing a directionality test.
The chapter contains the following information:
1. The Safety information presents warning and note signs, which the user should draw
attention to.
2. The Overview gives an overview over the major task when installing and commissioning the
protection equipment.
3. The Unpacking and checking the protective device contains instructions on how to
receive the protection equipment.
4. The Installing the protective device contains instructions on how to install the protection
equipment.
5. The Checking the external circuit contains instructions on how to check that the protection
equipment is properly connected to the protection system.
6. The Energizing the protective device contains instructions on how to start-up the
protection equipment.
7. The Setting the protective device contains instructions on how to download settings and
configuration to the protection equipment.
8. The Establishing connection and verifying communication contains instructions on how
to verify the communication.
9. The Verifying settings by secondary injection contains instructions on how to verify that
each included function operates correctly according to the set value.
The chapter is addressing the installation, commissioning and maintenance personnel responsible
for taking the protection into normal service and out of service. The installation personnel must
have a basic knowledge in handling electronic equipment. The commissioning and maintenance
personnel must be well experienced in using protection equipment, test equipment, protection
functions and the configured functional logics in the protection.

11.2 Safety Information

This section contains safety information. Warning signs are presented which attend the user to be
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

193

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

careful during certain operations in order to avoid human injuries or damage to equipment.

Warning signs
Warning!

Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations. Working in a high voltage
environment requires serious approach to avoid human injuries and damage to
equipment.

Do not touch circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.

Always avoid touching the circuitry when the cover is removed. The product contains
electronic circuitries which can be damaged if exposed to static electricity (ESD). The
electronic circuitries also contain high voltage which is lethal to humans.

Always use suitable isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.

Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a protection equipment

during normal operation. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be lethal.
Operation may be disrupted and protection equipment and measuring circuitry may be
damaged.

Always connect the protection equipment to protective ground, regardless of the

operating conditions. This also applies to special occasions such as bench testing,
demonstrations and off-site configuration. Operating the protection equipment without
proper grounding may damage both terminal and measuring circuitry, and may cause
injuries in case of an accident.

Never disconnect a secondary connection of current transformer circuit without

short-circuiting the transformers secondary winding. Operating a current transformer
with the secondary winding open will cause a massive potential build-up that may
damage the transformer and may cause injuries to humans.

Never unmount the front or back cover from a powered equipment or from a protection
equipment connected to powered circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.

Caution signs
Caution!

194

Always transport modules using certified conductive bags. Always handle modules using
a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground and on a suitable antistatic
surface. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may cause damage to the module.

Do not connect live wires to the protection equipment. Internal circuitry may be damaged.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Always use a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground when replacing
modules. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage the module and protection
equipment circuitry.

Take care to avoid electrical shock if accessing wiring and connection protection
equipment when installing and commissioning.

Note signs
Note!

Changing the active setting group will inevitably change the protection equipments
operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the change.

The protection assembly is designed for a maximum continuous current of four times
rated value.

Activating the other setting group without proper configuration may seriously affect the
protection equipments operation.

11.3 Overview
The settings for each function must be calculated before the commissioning task can start. A
configuration, made in the configuration and programming tool, must also be available if the
protection equipment does not have a factory configuration downloaded.
The protection equipment is unpacked and visually checked. It is preferably mounted in a cubicle.
The connection to the protection system has to be checked in order to verify that the installation
was successful.
The installation and commissioning task starts with configuring the digital communication modules,
if included. The protection equipment can then be configured and set, which means that settings
and a configuration has to be applied if the protection equipment does not have a factory
configuration downloaded. Then the operation of each included function according to applied
settings has to be verified by secondary injection. A complete check of the configuration can then
be made. A conformity test of the secondary system has also to be done. When the primary
system has been energized a directionality check should be made.

11.4 Unpacking And Checking The Protection Equipment

Procedure as below:
1.

Remove the transport casing.

2.

Visually inspect the protection equipment.

1)

Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

195

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

2)

The rating information should be given for the protection equipment.

3)

The rating information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.

Panel wiring

Check the conducting wire used in the panel to assure that their cross section meet the
requirement. Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label

Check all the isolator links, terminal blocks, ferrules, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Equipment plug-in modules

Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable

Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator links and push button

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator links and push buttons work normally
and smoothly.
3.

Check that all items are included in accordance with the delivery documents

The user is requested to check that all software functions are included according to the delivery
documents after the terminal has been energized.
4.

Check for transport damages

These product checks cover all aspects of the protection, which should be checked to ensure that
the protection not only has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning but also functions
correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.

11.5 Installing The Protective Device

11.5.1 Overview
The mechanical and electrical environmental conditions at the installation site must be within
permissible range according to the technical data of the protection equipment. Dusty, damp places,
places liable to rapid temperature variations, powerful vibrations and shocks, surge voltages of
high amplitude and fast rise time, strong induced magnetic fields or similar extreme conditions
should be avoided. Please refer to Chapter 1 for details.
Sufficient space must be available in front of and at rear of the protection panel to allow access for

196

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

maintenance and future modifications. Flush mounted protection equipment should be mounted
so that equipment modules can be added and replaced without excessive demounting.

11.5.2 Dimensions

101.6

177.0

The equipment adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-931 series is IEC
4U high and 19 wide. Figure 11.5-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.5-2 shows the panel
cut-out.

Figure 11.5-1 Dimensions of PCS-931

465.0

4-6.8
450.0
Figure 11.5-2 panel cut-out of PCS-931

11.5.3 Grounding Guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus. On the other hand,
electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of other apparatus.
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

197

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
Note!

All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.

11.5.4 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
Note!

If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (refer to Figure 11.5-3).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
Note!

For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials according
to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).

198

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Figure 11.5-3 Cubicle grounding system

11.5.5 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel (refer to Figure 11.5-4), and the ground braided
copper strip can be connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as
possible. The main thing is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from
unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of the relays, and the sign is GND. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (refer to Figure 11.5-4) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Figure 11.5-4 Ground terminal

11.5.6 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Data of braided copper strip: threaded M4, 4.0mm2. Proper terminations must be fitted to both
ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

199

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Figure 11.5-5 Ground strip and termination

11.5.7 Making the electrical connections

Always make sure established guidelines for this type of terminal is followed during installation.
When necessary use screened twisted-pair cables to minimize susceptibility. Otherwise, use any
kind of regular non-screened tinned RK cable or equivalent.
When using screened cabling always use 360 full screen cable bushing to ensure screen
coupling. Ensure that all signals of the single circuit are in the same single cable. Avoid mixing
current and voltage measuring signals in the same cable. Also use separate cables for control and
measuring circuits.
1.

Connecting the VT/CT circuits:

Heavy-duty terminal block, M4 threaded terminal ends. VT circuit must be connected with the
protective device through an MCB.
2.

Connecting the auxiliary power:

Auxiliary power cords cross can be directly screwed fixed on the rear panel of DC board. Refer to
section 6.3.12.
3.

Input/output signal connectors:

Welding terminals. Those devices are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections
to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two
ring terminals per relay terminal.
To meet the insulation requirements of the terminal block, for the sake of safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
The wire used for all connections to the welding terminal blocks and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except the EIA RS-485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary power circuit wiring should be protected by using a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits
must never be open.
4.

Connecting to protective ground:

Connect the unit to the grounding bar of the cubicle with green/yellow conductor; connected to the
protective Earthing terminal at the back of the DC board. Refer to section 6.3.12. Attend that the
earth wire must be as short as possible. All cautions have to be taken to ensure the best electrical
200

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

conductivity, particularly the contact quality, stainless conductor. The impedance between the relay
Earthing terminal and the Earth must be less than 20m under 12Volt, 50Hz. What matters is that
the device has to be only grounded at one point. Loop grounding from unit to unit is not allowed.
5.

Installing the optic fibres

Connectors are generally color coded; connect blue or dark grey cable connectors to blue or dark
grey (receive) back-side connectors. Connect black or grey cable connectors to black or grey
(transmit) back-side connectors.
Fiber optical cables are sensitive to handling. Do not bend too sharply. The minimum curvature
radius is 15 cm for plastic fibers and 25 cm for glass fibers. If cable straps are used, apply with
loose fit.
Note!

Always hold the connector, never the cable, when connecting or disconnecting optical
fibres. Do not twist, pull or bend the fibre. Invisible damage may increase fibre damping
thus making communication impossible.
6.

Installing the RS-485 serial port communication cables

When using galvanic connection between protective relay and communication equipment or
point-to-point galvanic connection between two protective relays it is essential that the cable
installation is carefully done. This is true regardless of type of module used, only the possible
length of the cable differs. The factors that must be taken into account is the susceptibility for noise
disturbance, due to that the levels of the communication signal are very low. For a best result, a
cable with twisted pairs with screen should be used.
RS485 serial communication interface, a termination 120-ohm resistor has to be connected at
each extremity of the bus. Refer to Chapter 10.

11.6 Check the External Circuit

The user must check the installation, which includes verifying that the relay is connected to the
other parts of the protection system. This is done with the relay and all connected circuits
de-energized.
1.

Checking the VT/CT circuits

Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied wiring diagram.
Test the circuitry. The following tests are recommended:
1)

Polarity check

2)

CT circuit current measurement (primary injection test)

3)

Grounding check

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

201

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

The polarity check verifies the integrity of the circuits and the phase relationship. The check should
be performed as close as possible to the relay. The primary injection test verifies the CT ration and
the wiring all the way through from the primary system to the relay. Injection must be performed for
each phase-to-neutral circuit and each phase-to-phase pair. In each case currents in all phases
and the neutral line are measured.
2.

Checking the power supply

Check that the value of the auxiliary supply voltage remains with the permissible range under all
operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct according to the instruction manual on the
rear plate of DC board.
3.

Checking binary input circuits

Preferably, disconnect the binary input connector form the binary input cards. Check all connected
signals so that both input level and polarity are in accordance with the relays specifications.
Note!

The binary inputs may be energized from an external dc auxiliary supply (e.g. the station
battery) in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field
voltage otherwise damage to the protection may result. The status of each binary input can
be viewed using either tool software installed in a portable PC or by checking the front
man-machine interface LCD. When each binary input is energized the display will change
to indicate the new state of the inputs.
4.

Checking binary output circuits

Preferably, disconnect the binary output connector form the binary output cards. Check all
connected signals so that both load and polarity are in accordance with the relays specifications.

11.7 Energizing The Protective Device

Before the procedures in this section can be carried out the connection to external circuitry must
have been checked which ensures that the installation was made correctly.
The user must energize the power supply to the relay to start it up. This could be done in a
numerous of ways, from energizing a whole cubicle to energizing a single relay. The user should
reconfigure the relay settings. The relay time must be set. The self-supervision function should
also be checked to verify that the relay unit operates properly. The user could also check the
software version, the relays serial number, the installed modules, and their ordering number to
ensure that the relay is according to delivery and ordering specifications.
1.

Checking front panel LCD display

The liquid crystal display (LCD) is designed to operate in a wide range of substation ambient
temperatures. For this purpose, this relay has an automatic LCD contrast adjusting feature,
which is capable to adjust LCD contrast automatically according to the ambient temperature.
202

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
2.

Setting the date and time of the protective device

If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item CLOCK.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
3.

Checking light emitting diodes (LEDs)

On power up, the green LED HEALTHY should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the protective device is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclosing when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.

11.8 Setting The Protective Device

The customer specific values for each setting parameter have to be available. Each function
included in the relay has several setting parameters which has to be set in order to make the relay
behave as intended. A default value is provided for each parameter from factory.
All settings can be:
1.

Download from a PC or laptop with tool software or remotely by SCADA. Front port
communication has to be established before the settings can be downloaded.

2.

Entered manually through the local HMI

To change settings through the local HMI need a password which is +, , and - keyboard
on the front panel.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the
application-specific settings to be applied to the protection and for testing of any scheme logic
applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the protections internal programmable scheme
logic.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

203

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.9 Establishing Connection And Verifying Communication

This test should only be performed where the protection is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the
remote location, just the protections rear communications port and any protocol converter
necessary.

11.10 Verifying Settings by Secondary Injection

Required tools for testing of a protective device:
Minimum equipment required:

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0-250V
respectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

Phase angle meter.

Phase rotation meter.

Note!

Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

An EPSON 300K printer.

PCS-9000 serials dedicated protection tester HELP2000.

At the same time, the calculated settings, substation configuration diagram, the protective device
diagram and the instruction manual is essential to test the protective device.
The relay has to be set before the testing can start. Only the functions that are used should be
tested.
The response from a test can be viewed in different ways:
204

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Binary output signals

Service values in the local HMI

A PC with tool software or SCADA or master station

All used setting groups should be tested. The user can release the functions to be tested and
prevent other functions from operation by setting the corresponding parameters. The user could
also energize the binary input [BI_BlkComm] to disable communication function to ensure that no
events are reported to remote station during the test.
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific protection settings (i.e. both the
protections function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have
been correctly applied to the protection.

11.10.1 Insulation Test (if required)

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

Voltage transformer circuits

Current transformer circuits

DC power supply

Optic-isolated control inputs

Output contacts

Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.

Test method:

To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the Insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection

11.10.2 AC Measurement Check

1.

Current measurement check

This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked
either in the protections submenu CPU_METERING column or a portable computer connected
to the front communication port with tool software.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 5%. However, an additional allowance must be
NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

205

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

2.

Voltage measurement check

This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading either in the protections
submenu CPU_METERING or a portable computer connected to the front communication port
with tool software.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 5%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

11.10.3 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1. Trip event report
2. Binary input when protection devices start
3. Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4. Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5. The setting value when the protection device trips

11.10.4 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:
1. Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
2. Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
3. Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.

206

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.11 Final Check

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LEDs has been reset before leaving the protection.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

207

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

208

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 12 Maintenance

Chapter 12 Maintenance
NARI-RELAYS numerical relay PCS-931 is designed to require no special maintenance. All
measurement and signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully
solid state. The output relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

12.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AI module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.

12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the ALM_REPORT screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

Test circuit connections are correct

Modules are securely inserted in position

Correct DC power voltage is applied

Correct AC inputs are applied

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

209

Chapter 12 Maintenance

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

12.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu VERSION.
Caution!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the MON module, check the settings.
1)

Replacing a module

Switch off the DC power supply

Disconnect the trip outputs

Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Unscrew the module.

Warning!

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2)

Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

Open the relay front panel

Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

Detach the HMI module from the relay

Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3)

Replacing the AI, PWR, DSP, BI or BO module

210

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 12 Maintenance

Unscrew the module connector

Unplug the connector from the target module.

Unscrew the module.

Pull out the module

Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

After replacing the DSP module, input the application-specific setting values again.
Warning!

Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
Warning!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the DSP module, check the settings.
Danger!

After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.

12.4 Replace Button Battery

When the voltage of button Battery on CPU board is below 2.5 volts (nominal voltage is 3 volts),
please replace the button battery to ensure internal clock of CPU board running correctly.

12.5 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

12.6 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

211

Chapter 12 Maintenance

60255-6 the storage temperature should be from -25oC to 70oC, but the temperature of from -10oC
to 40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

212

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13.1 Decommissioning
1.

Switching off

To switch off the PCS-931, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2.

Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
Danger!

Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC module of the
PCS-931, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.
Danger!

Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.
3.

Dismantling

The PCS-931 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
Danger!

When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

13.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
Note!

Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

213

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

214

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Chapter 14 Manual Version History

Chapter 14 Manual Version History

In the latest version of PCS-931, several descriptions on existing features have been modified.
These are described with reference to the table listed below:
Manual History
Software Version

Manual Version

R1.00

V1.00

Source

Documentation

PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Modification Recorder
Manual Version

Section

Page No.

V1.00

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

Description of change

Note

Original release

215